JP2020127675A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of livening up an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can set a big winning probability to any one of a plurality of set values such as set value 1 to set value 3, by a mode corresponding to suggestion related to setting means, the game machine can execute an operation promotion performance such as a shooting promotion performance. A backup storage part is provided as a continuous one storage region. When a during-writing flag is on, new backup data is inhibited from being written, and out of event occurrence conditions according to a plurality of electronic components, if first and second occurrence conditions are satisfied, if writing processing of backup data corresponding to one condition is being executed, writing processing of backup data corresponding to the other condition is not executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-9

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game using an operation member.

As a generally known game machine of this type, there has been one capable of playing games using an operating member.

As such a gaming machine, there is one in which a set value such as a jackpot probability can be set to any one of a plurality of set values, and a character image is displayed at the start or stop of variable display. Therefore, there has been an effect that suggests a set value (see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2010-200902, A

However, in the production that suggests the set value in the mode as in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it is insufficient to make the game more interesting.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enlarging interest in a game.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing games using operation members (gaming handle 30, lever, stop button, etc.),
Setting means (CPU 103 or the like) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 3 or the like) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
A game control means (CPU 103 or the like) capable of controlling in a plurality of types of game states (big hit game state, probability variation state, time saving state, etc.) including an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Corresponding to the change in the game state, operation promotion effect that promotes a predetermined operation (right hit effect, left hit effect, start switch operation notification, stop button operation notification, etc. in FIG. 8-5, FIG. 8-6, etc.) It is provided with an executable effect executing means (effect control CPU 120, S176, S170 to S173, etc.),
The effect execution means, corresponding to the suggestion (setting change suggestion, setting suggestion) regarding the set value (gold right hitting effect selected in FIG. 8-8, black right hitting effect, FIG. 8-9 and FIG. 8- The operation promotion effect by blue right (left) striking effect, green right (left) striking effect, red right (left) striking effect, navigation display in navi effect, bonus confirming display in bonus confirming effect, etc. selected in 10) Can be executed (setting change suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C1), first setting value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C2), second setting value of FIG. 8-6 (D1). Suggested right-handed production, third set value suggested right-handed production of FIG. 8-6 (E1), set value suggestive left-handed production of FIG. 8-6 (H1) left-handed production, set value suggested production in navigation production , Bonus value set production, etc.),
further,
A control unit capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components (for example, a microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and memory contents can be retained even when power supply to a gaming machine is stopped, and information regarding the plurality of electronic components can be stored. Storage means (for example, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D), and the control means writes the information in the storage means when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied. Processing (for example, writing processing by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10) can be executed, and the storage unit corresponds to the storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and the second generation condition. The storage area in which the second information is written is provided as one continuous area (for example, the backup storage area 41AKA1 including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13), and the first generation condition and the second generation condition are satisfied. In this case, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition is not executed (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON). A game machine is mentioned.

According to such a configuration, the operation promotion effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means, so that the suggestion regarding the setting means can make the game more exciting. In addition, information can be managed appropriately.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
By operating the operation member, a game medium is launched to play a game,
The effect execution means emits a specific operation promoting effect (right-handed effect etc.) for promoting the emission of the game medium to a specific path (right-handed path etc.) and the emission of the game medium to a predetermined path (left-handed path etc.). It is possible to execute a predetermined operation promotion effect (left effect, etc.) to be promoted (FIG. 8-5(C), FIG. 8-6(D), FIG. 8-6(E), FIG. 8-6(H). etc),
The specific operation promotion effect and the predetermined operation promotion effect differ in the rate of executing the operation promotion effect according to the mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means ((A1), (A2), (B1 in FIG. 8-7). ), the execution ratio of the set value suggestion effect is different between the right-handing effect of (B2) and the left-handing effect of (B3).

According to such a configuration, the ratio of executing the operation promotion effect according to the mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means is different between the specific launch promotion effect and the predetermined launch promotion effect, and thus the type of the effect that suggests the setting means And, the frequency can be diversified, and the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The effect execution means can execute the predetermined operation promotion effect when the advantageous state ends (FIG. 8-6(H), etc.), and corresponds to the suggestion regarding the setting means in the predetermined operation promotion effect. The operation promotion effect according to the aspect can be executed (FIG. 8-6 (H1) and the like).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the execution time of the effect that suggests the setting means, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The specific operation promotion effect includes a first specific operation promotion effect (a right-handed display image effect, etc.) and a second specific operation promotion effect (a right-handed lamp 102F001 lighting effect, etc.),
The effect execution means, in the first specific operation promotion effect and the second specific operation promotion effect, the ratio of executing the operation promotion effect according to the mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means is different (FIG. 8-5 and As shown in FIG. 8-6, setting change effect or set value suggestion effect can be executed in the right hitting effect by the right hitting display images 102F002 to 102F010, but setting change effect or setting value suggestion in the lighting effect of the right hitting lamp 102F001. Do not execute the production).
The effect execution means, depending on the type of game state, the ratio of executing the operation promotion effect in a mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the set value is different (Fig. 8-7 etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the type and frequency of the effect that suggests the setting means, and to further enhance the interest in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect execution means, depending on the type of the game state, the ratio of executing the operation promotion effect in a mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means is different (Fig. 8-7 etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the type and frequency of the game state that suggests the setting means, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When the setting value is changed, the effect execution means is first controlled to the advantageous state (FIG. 8-7 (A1) etc.) and thereafter controlled to the advantageous state (FIG. 8-7 (A2), etc.), the ratio of executing the operation promotion effect according to the mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means is different.

With such a configuration, when the set value is changed, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the timing at which the setting is controlled in the advantageous state and the frequency of the performance that makes a suggestion regarding the setting means. Can be raised.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
When the advantageous state shifts from the first advantageous state (big hit gaming state or the like) to the second advantageous state (probability change state or the like), the effect execution means has the operation promotion effect according to a suggestion regarding the setting means. Can be executed in a special mode (such as the triple arrow in FIG. 8-8 (D1)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the types of effects that suggest the setting means, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The effect execution means performs a specific launch promotion effect (right-handed effect etc.) for promoting the launch of the game medium to a specific path (right-handed path etc.) and a game medium to a predetermined path (left-handed path etc.). It is possible to execute a predetermined launch promotion effect (left-handed effect etc.) to be promoted (FIG. 8-5(C), FIG. 8-6(D), FIG. 8-6(E), FIG. 8-6(H). etc),
Further comprising detection means (right gate switch) capable of detecting the game medium in the specific path,
The effect execution means can execute the predetermined shoot promotion effect when the game medium is detected by the detection means in a game state (low accurate low base state) in which it is not necessary to emit the game medium to the specific path. Therefore, when performing the predetermined launch effect in the game state, the set value suggestion effect is not executed ([other operation promotion notification]).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously identifying an unintended game as an intended game.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described below include the inventions according to the following means (9) to (16). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, information about an abnormality that has occurred, such as that disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-182314, is notified, and when the abnormality is resolved, the information about the abnormality is not saved, so it is possible to identify and analyze the defect. There are known gaming machines that may be difficult. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately managing information.

In the game machine of (9),
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
A control unit capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components (for example, a microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and memory contents can be retained even when power supply to a gaming machine is stopped, and information regarding the plurality of electronic components can be stored. Storage means (for example, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, etc.),
The control unit executes a writing process (for example, a writing process by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10) for writing the information in the storage unit when an event occurrence condition corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied. It is possible that the storage means has a continuous one area (a storage area where the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and a storage area where the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written). For example, it is provided as a backup storage unit 41AKA1 including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13), and when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied, during the process of writing information corresponding to one condition. Does not execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on).
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

(10) In the gaming machine of (9),
The generation condition may be achievable in accordance with an internal state of the control means (for example, CPU internal error 41AKC1, VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, etc.).
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (10) above,
The first occurrence condition can be satisfied according to an internal state of the control means (for example, CPU internal error 41AKC1, VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, etc.),
The second generation condition can be satisfied according to a processing result by the control means (for example, effect control error determination 41AKC3, etc.), and the second generation condition is satisfied when the first generation condition is satisfied. The writing process may be executed with priority over the case (see FIG. 15B, for example).
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (11) above,
When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, next time according to execution information (for example, the writing flag 41AKF1) indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition is being executed. The process of writing the information corresponding to the condition of may be restricted.
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (12) above,
In the writing process, the same information may be stored in a plurality of storage areas (for example, backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3).
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (13) above,
The control means, when a write condition different from the generation condition is satisfied, a process of writing game-related information different from the information on the plurality of electronic components to the storage means (for example, according to the setting of the backup control table 120T). Backup process).
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (14) above,
Output means (for example, connectors 90152 to 90155) capable of outputting a control signal for the plurality of electronic components and capable of outputting a read signal according to the stored information of the storage means may be provided.
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (15) above,
A first output unit (for example, connectors 90152 to 90155) capable of outputting control signals for the plurality of electronic components, and a first output unit capable of outputting a read signal according to stored information of the storage unit unlike the first output unit. Two output means (for example, connector 90156 or the like) may be provided.
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

The present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portions 102F and 103F. It is the figure which illustrates the production control command in feature section 102F. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing in the feature section 102F. It is the flowchart which shows the sub side game stop processing in the feature section 102F. FIG. 11 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of an effect capable of executing a setting suggestion effect in a launch promotion effect when a big hit occurs. Probability that setting suggestion can be executed in the launch promotion effect that is executed in each of the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game state of the probability jackpot and the low accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game state of the normal jackpot. It is a display screen figure of the image display apparatus 5 which shows an example. It is a figure showing a data table used for deciding the presence or absence of execution of setting change production and various set value suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the setting change suggestion effect type selection table used for selecting and determining the kind of setting change suggestion effect. It is a diagram showing a set value suggestion effect type selection table used for selecting and determining the type of set value suggestion effect for each game state. It is a diagram showing a set value suggestion effect type selection table used for selecting and determining the type of set value suggestion effect for each game state. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the various circuits and the like which are loaded in the production control baseplate. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a backup memory substrate, etc. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is the figure which shows the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing and processing priority. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a CPU exception event occurrence process and an example of a VDP error interrupt process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for production control. It is the figure which shows the contents example of the production control command for game. It is the figure which shows the contents example of the production control command which becomes the test command. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the receiving order of a test command, and the process to perform. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a backup control table. It is a figure which shows the specific example which displays a maintenance history screen. It is a figure which shows the specific example which displays a maintenance history screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 41AK. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 42AK. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 42AK. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 43AK. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 44AK. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 45AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. The variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended, and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. To display the first number of reserved memories, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when entering one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (eg, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending storages, which is the number of universal figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that the player can press. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

It should be noted that, when the game ball enters (start winning) the starting winning opening during the period during which the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (a start prize has occurred, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit" symbol is given, and the jackpot symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, it is a “small hit”. Also, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, "missing symbol" is generated.

After the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" category is set. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big-hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described later) are prepared, and the big hit is determined according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. Note that, similar to the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the big hit type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of becoming "per figure" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

The time saving state and the probability changing state continue until any one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

The normal state is a game state other than the special state such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on as in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset). The state is controlled in the same manner as when the processing was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and/or excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing at which the display result (also called the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later, the decorative design not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect in which is continued.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are displayed together and stopped, and after the jackpot gaming state is terminated, it is changed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation pattern (normal pattern). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" The common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is “miss”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach miss”) (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative design may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display before the execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display is simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit midfield effect for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit midfield effect, an effect that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion effect that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. Incidentally, during the small hit game state, some big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state of the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, big hit type that makes the subsequent game state a highly accurate state) big hit game By executing a common effect in the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-precision state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of ordinary figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (ReadOnlyMemory) 101, a RAM (RandomAccessMemory) 102, a CPU (CentralProcessingUnit) 103, and a random number circuit 104. And an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when it has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By the transmission of the detection signal, passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, a production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), command for specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and effects (various effects according to the progress of the game based on the received effect control command, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described functions of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (VideoDisplayProcessor), a CGROM (CharacterGeneratorROM), a VRAM (VideoRAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, for example. And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interruption prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, RAM 102 accessible settings, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power failure, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being restored from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Information such as the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold display device 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure patterns.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the winning prize set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in correspondence with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not to display "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol fluctuation processing, the processing which does the setting in order to change the special design in the 1st special design display 4A and the 2nd special design display 4B, and the elapsed time after that special design starts fluctuation It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". When the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process of opening the big hit ends.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation that notifies the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on that the display result is "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing in step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of the winning prize transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command for designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the main board 11 receives an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "miss". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Also, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 designating termination of the small hitting game state, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit medium effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit mid-game production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of end effect effect control at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game medium is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating “-” may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic parts 102F and 103F)
[Outline of Control of Characteristic Parts 102F and 103F]
Next, the characteristic parts 102F and 103F of the present embodiment will be described. Regarding the characteristic portions 102F and 103F, a technique for a pachinko gaming machine in which setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, such as a winning probability of a big hit, can be set by the setting means will be described below. The game control microcomputer 100 also has a function as a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player as a setting value of the winning probability of the big hit.

First, the set value will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in this example, a jackpot winning probability according to a set value is changed by a setting change operation using a predetermined switch or the like by a person on the game hall side (a clerk at the game hall). It is configured.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a setting change process is executed to change the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in response to a setting change operation. Thus, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table according to the set value, the setting change process that allows the jackpot winning probability to be changed is executed. The set value includes, for example, three stages (a plurality of stages) of 1 to 3, and the winning probability of the big hit increases in the order of set value 1<set value 2<set value 3. That is, when the set value 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the advantage gradually increases in the order of the set value 2<the set value 3. It should be noted that the set value is not limited to three steps as long as it is provided in a plurality of steps. In this way, the rate of balls (the number of balls per unit time (number of prize balls)) changes according to the fact that the winning probability of the big hit can be changed. It can be said that

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the selection of the set value by the setting changing operation at the time of turning on the power. Of the three setting values, for example, the setting value 3 may be referred to as a high setting with a high jackpot winning probability, and for example, the setting value 1 may be referred to as a low setting with a low jackpot winning probability.

Also, the selection probability of the type of the big hit may be changeable by setting the set value 1 to the set value 3 similarly to the winning probability of the big hit. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may be changeable by setting the setting values 1 to 3 like the winning probability of the big hit. The selection probability of the variation pattern may also be changeable by setting the setting values 1 to 3 like the winning probability of the big hit.

Regarding the characteristic portions 102F and 103F, in a pachinko gaming machine capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values, a setting value suggesting effect that suggests which setting value the setting value is (hereinafter, A control example of executing a setting value suggestion effect) and an effect related to a setting change suggestion (hereinafter, referred to as a setting change suggestion effect) that suggests that the setting value has been changed (setting change processing was executed at startup). explain. In the following description, the setting value suggestion and the setting change suggestion may be collectively referred to as a setting suggestion, and the setting value suggestion effect and the setting change suggestion effect may be collectively referred to as a setting suggestion effect.

As for the characteristic portion 102F, a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game by launching a game medium and capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is directed to a specific path. In the case where the launch promotion effect for promoting the launch of the game medium (game ball) can be executed, an example in which the launch promotion effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means will be described. Specifically, an example will be described in which the setting suggestion effect (including the setting value suggestion effect and the setting change suggestion effect) is executed in the launch promotion effect.

Regarding the characteristic portion 103F, a game using the operation member is possible, and in a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, it is advantageous for the player. Suggestion regarding the setting means when it is possible to control to a plurality of types of game states including an advantageous state, including a launch promotion effect, and capable of executing an operation promotion effect that promotes a predetermined operation in response to changes in the game state An example in which the operation promotion effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the above will be described. Specifically, an example in which the setting suggestion effect (including the setting value suggestion effect and the setting change suggestion effect) is executed in the operation promotion effect including the launch promotion effect will be described.

With regard to the description of the characteristic parts 102F and 103F, the firing promotion effect will be described as a representative example of the operation promotion effect in the description of the characteristic part 103F. Therefore, in the description of the characteristic portions 102F and 103F, the control that enables execution of the launch promotion effect in a mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means will be described.

In addition, in the characteristic units 102F and 103F, a setting will be described as an example in which the jackpot type is selected and determined to be one of the “non-probable variation” and the “probable variation”. The "non-probable variation" jackpot is hereinafter referred to as a normal jackpot. The "probable variation" jackpot is hereinafter referred to as "probable variation jackpot."

In the case of a normal big hit, after the big hit game state ends, it becomes a time saving state (high base state) until a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed in a low probability state (indeterminate change state). .. Such a gaming state is called a low certainty high base state. After such a time saving state is completed, it is controlled to a low base state (a control state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second start winning port) in a low probability state (non-probability change state). Such a gaming state is called a low-probability low-base state. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the initial state of the start is basically a low-probability low-base state.

In the case of the probability variation big hit, after the termination of the big hit game state, a high probability state (probability variation state) and a time saving state (high base state) are set until a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Such a game state is called a high-accuracy high-base state. After the completion of such a highly accurate high base state, the low accurate low base state is controlled. In the case of a small hit, the game state does not change before and after the end of the small hit game state.

The jackpot type may be selectable from a combination of a plurality of types different from such a combination of a plurality of types.

[Structure of the game area of the characteristic portions 102F and 103F]
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portions 102F and 103F, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. Regarding the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1, the parts different from the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 1 will be mainly described.

The movement path of the game ball in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 of FIG. 8-1 is the first movement path through which the game ball can flow in the left-side game area of the image display device 5, and the image display device 5. It includes a second movement path through which the game ball can flow down in the right game area. The launching operation (launching operation) of the player who strikes the game ball on the first movement path is called a left-handed operation (left-handed operation). The launching operation (launching operation) of the player who hits the game ball on the second movement path is called a right-handed operation (right-handed operation). The first movement route is also called a left-handed route. The second moving route is also called a right-handed route.

The first movement path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down in response to the game ball being launched with a relatively weak launching force by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30. The second movement route is a route that allows the game ball to flow down in response to the game ball being launched with a relatively strong launching force by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30.

Unlike FIG. 1, the passage gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is not provided in the left side game area which is the first movement path, but is provided in the right side game area which is the second movement path. The passage gate 41 is also called a right passage gate. The gate switch used for the passage gate 41 provided in the right game area is also called a right gate switch. As in FIG. 1, the winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5 in the center of the game area in the left-right direction. The position where the winning ball apparatus 6A is provided is included in the first movement route.

Unlike in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 6B is not provided on the first moving path below the winning ball device 6A, but is provided below the passage gate 41 in the right game area which is the second moving path. At the upper part of the variable winning ball device 6B, a blocking member is provided to prevent the game ball from entering the variable winning ball device 6B when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position. As a result, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port when the movable wing piece is in the tilted position, and the movable wing piece is in the vertical position. The tip of one piece is close to the blocking member, and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, which is a closed state.

Unlike the case of FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is not provided on the first moving path below the winning ball device 6A, but is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B in the right game area which is the second moving path. ing.

A plurality of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7. By disposing such obstacle nails, a game ball that is launched by a left-handed operation and flows down the first movement route can enter the winning ball device 6A, but is provided on the second movement route. It is impossible to enter the passage gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. On the other hand, since such obstacle nails are provided, the game balls that are launched by the right-handing operation and flow down the second moving route are the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B provided on the second moving route. , And the special variable winning ball device 7 can be entered, but the winning ball device 6A cannot be won.

In the characteristic portions 102F and 103F, in the case of a low-probability low-base state, the one who hits left and aims for the start winning prize to the winning ball device 6A, hits the right and targets the starting prize to the variable winning ball device 6B. Starting prizes are more likely to occur than those who do. Therefore, in the low-probability low-base state, the player basically hits left. Further, in the case of the big hit game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 provided in the second movement path is opened, so that the player makes a right hit. Then, in the high-probability high-base state after the probability variation big hit and the low-probability high base state after the normal big hit, it is better for the player to hit the right and hit the left to hit the start winning prize to the variable winning ball device 6B. Starting prizes are more likely to occur than those aiming for 6A starting prizes. Therefore, in the high-probability-high base state and the low-probability-high base state, the player basically hits left.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the characteristic portions 102F and 103F, it is necessary for the player to selectively use left-handed and right-handed ball hitting operations. In particular, right-handedness needs to be executed in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a big hit game state, a high certainty high base state after the probability variation big hit, and a low certainty high base state after the normal big hit. Therefore, in the gaming state where it is necessary to make a right-handed stroke, the right-handed lamp 102F001 that emits light in order to give an effect of notifying the right-handed operation (hereinafter referred to as an operation-promoting effect) is on the right side of the image display device 5. It is provided on the side. The right-handed lamp 102F001 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portions 102F and 103F, in each of the big hit game state, the highly accurate high base state after the probability variation big hit, and the low certainty high base state after the normal big hit, in the image display device 5, the right Images such as various right-pointing arrow images (hereinafter referred to as right-handed images) are displayed in order to provide a hitting operation promotion effect. In this way, the operation promotion effect using the right-handed image and the right-handed lamp 102F001 is called a right-handed effect.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portions 102F and 103F, at the end of each of the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state after the normal big hit, the left-handed operation promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5. In order to do this, images such as various leftward arrow images (hereinafter referred to as left-handed images) are displayed. In this way, the operation promotion effect using the left-handed image is called a left-handed effect.

[Composition of command of characteristic parts 102F and 103F]
FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command used by the characteristic units 102F and 103F. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte represents MODE (command classification) and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-2 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-2, the command 8001H is a first variation start command that designates variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. It is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) of a design or the like. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8(B), the determination result of whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ) Or different EXT data depending on the determination result (big hit type determination result) as to which of the plurality of types of big hit types when the variable display result is “big hit”.

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to identify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening to notify that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. With the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designation command which notifies that the 1st starting condition for executing the special drawing game which uses the 1st special drawing in 1st special design indicator 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start winning combination designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning combination and the second start condition has been established. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8A is activated without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 8A has been activated by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting value changing state). .. The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value changing operation has ended in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the setting value confirmation operation has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the set value confirmation state). .. The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation of confirming the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1 has been completed.

The commands are F1XXH and F2XXH. These commands are effect control commands indicating the contents of the winning determination results such as the jackpot type determination and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Of these, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command that indicates whether or not a big hit is included in the winning judgment results, and the judgment result of the type of the big hit. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result.

The command F1XXH is a symbol designating command that indicates whether or not a big hit is included in the winning judgment results, and the judgment result of the type of big hit. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result.

The command F301H is a right-handing lamp lighting designation command that designates that the right-handing lamp 102F001 is turned on. The command F302H is a right-handed lamp extinguishing designation command that designates turning off the right-handed lamp 102F002.

[Processing based on fluctuation pattern designation command]
Based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to perform variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, the image display device 5 may be provided with a constant small design in which the decorative design is reduced corresponding to the variable display of the special design. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variable display of the constantly displayed small symbols.

[Production control main processing]
Next, the effect control main processing executed in the characteristic units 102F and 103F will be described. FIG. 8-3 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing in the characteristic units 102F and 103F. In FIG. 8C, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and the CTC (counter/counter) mounted on the effect control board 12. Register settings for the timer circuit).

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; N), the processing of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 is repeatedly executed, and waits until the command reception waiting timer times out.

When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1 is restored from the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (player information input described later) After the input of the player information is accepted in the process, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407) and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots stored in the RAM 122 since the last time the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, the number of big hits, (207SGS409) while clearing the information including the number of times of super-reach, and notifying that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared and that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by displaying an image on the image display device 5, emitting the game effect lamp 9, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices to be able to inform the clerk of the game hall that the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

If the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8A is activated in the set value changed state or the set value confirmed state. , Performs setting value related notification processing for performing notification of setting value changing operation (setting value changing notification) and setting value confirmation notification (setting value checking notification) (207SGS412). In the set value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting variable is being updated and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After the setting value related notification process is executed in 207SGS412, the sub game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when the production control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the production control CPU 120 stops the game. The process is executed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 8-4.

After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y). ) Proceeds to 207 SGS427.

When the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command have not been received by the 207SGS 411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error specification command has been received (207SGS425). When the error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification process (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed, and when the error designation command is not received (207SGS425; N), , 207 SGS403.

When the process proceeds to 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display device 5 The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the received command is started. For example, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1 Then, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 as the initial design with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left. If the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if a new setting value may have been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8A, the image display device 5 is initially set. As the design, the display of the decorative design is started with a combination of "4", "5", and "6" from the left.

If there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1, if a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set, The decorative design may be displayed as a combination of “4”, “5”, and “6” as the initial design at a higher rate than the case where the setting value unfavorable to the person (for example, “1”) is set. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1, a case where a setting value advantageous for the player (for example, “3”) is set, and a game The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different when the set value which is disadvantageous to the person is set (for example, “1”). In addition, the speaker 8L, 8R is used depending on whether a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set or a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player is set (for example, "1"). The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Next, in order to restrict the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the first four changes, "4" is set in the pre-reading restriction counter (207SGS428). After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8A has been started (207SGS431). In the activation notification processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is specified which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, The boot notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the boot notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start notification process timer is started, the start notification process is executed at the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. The notification may be executed.

In the characteristic unit 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8A is activated is a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification. The mode of the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on which one of the commands. For example, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1, that is, a new set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1. When is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when a cold start notification command is received when activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1, that is, a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and data in the RAM 102 is When it is cleared, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. It should be noted that although the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R are the same, the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

With the specific control in the present invention, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R. From the output of the output sound A for 30 seconds, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the production control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. Output sound B is output.

Further, when the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received when activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8A, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speaker 8L. , 8R, the output sound C is output for 20 seconds, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value change is completed). It should be noted that the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same, The emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, if the set value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1, a hot start notification command or a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Unlike the case in which the image display device 5 displays the message image, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

It should be noted that an example is shown in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a gaming machine management computer or a counter of each machine, and a start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. As an alternative, a signal capable of specifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

Moreover, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1 is started in any of a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, and a setting confirmation state, a device that executes the start notification is partly common (in either case. Also performs the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot start or cold start. , The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether it is started in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, a message image is displayed on the image display device 5). Is displayed, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, a signal may be output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device).

Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8A is activated in each of the devices for performing the activation notification depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Good. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamp 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 8-1 is started in the setting change state, the gaming machine frame is in an open state, so sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (pachinko machine). (If the gaming machine 1 is provided with three or more speakers, sound is output only from some speakers.) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the gaming machine frame is closed. Since it is often the case that the speaker is on, sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, while displaying a message image indicating that the setting is being changed such as “setting changing” on the image display device 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started up at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals, the terminals that output signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, as a setting value change notification, a period until the change of the set value is completed (until a set value change end notification command or a set value designation command is received. A signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over the period) to the management apparatus, and after the setting value change is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management apparatus as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is commonly used in each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, in the boot notification process, the boot notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The activation notification of may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. In addition, the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1 is executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command is received. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if received from among these hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value confirmation end notification command, setting value change end notification command A command that does not execute the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided.

In addition, as an initialization effect, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8A is activated, or the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. Accordingly, different combinations of decorative designs may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the mode of the launch notification as these initialization effects and the combination of decorative designs may be in accordance with the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. And all may be different, or only some may be the same.

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 8A is started by hot start, cold start, started in setting change state, or started in setting confirmation state, the start notification is executed. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are not executed. Good.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a power-off detection process (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. If the power-off signal is not input, the process is terminated, and if the power-off signal is input, the backup data including the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 is specified and specified. The backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122. Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area, the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis processing, which command (see FIG. 8-2) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a production random number updating process (207SGS435) that updates the count value of the counter for generating a production random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, a player information input process (207SGS436) that receives input of player information, and a game. A player information output process (207SGS437) for outputting player information, and a performance information totaling process (207SGS438) for totaling performance information are executed. Then, it transfers to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the player's stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to generate a password (a password generated in an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receives the input of the generated password) and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc., as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output processing, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. After the completion of displaying the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. It should be noted that the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone to transmit the player information aggregated in the current game to an external server, so that FIG. It is possible to store cumulative player information in one pachinko gaming machine 1 in the server.

In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time variation display, big hit game, and super reach are executed. To do.

[Sub-side game stop processing]
FIG. 8-4 is a flowchart showing the sub-side game stop processing executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (40FS010). When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state to display the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. When it is determined that the second variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby causing the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The control CPU 120 for effect control controls the image display device 5 to operate by displaying the variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the small pattern at all times by discarding the variable pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Can be prevented from running. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the special winning opening open designation command is received. When it is determined that the special winning opening opening designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the special winning opening open designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the special winning opening opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can turn it off. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning opening designation command has been received. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so that the hold display of the first hold information by operating the image display device 5 is not displayed. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning opening designation command has been received. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so that the hold display of the second hold information by operating the image display device 5 is not displayed. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a symbol designating command has been received. When it is determined that the symbol designating command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the symbol designating command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can cancel the winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to be emitted by discarding the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent the prize-change hold change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. .. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. When it is determined that the fluctuation type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the fluctuation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can avoid executing the winning flash effect under the control of causing the lamp to emit light by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the prize-winning pending change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. it can. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a test command has been received. Here, the test command is a command that is directly transmitted to the production control board 12 from a device that sends a command for confirming the state of the screen or the state of the accessory provided at the time of factory shipment. .. When transmitting the test command, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to transmitting the test command is connected to the effect control board 12.

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. When it is determined that the test command is received, the control according to the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and thereby the predetermined control is performed. Display the check screen. In this way, the processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, the commands shown in FIG. 8-2. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. When it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from performing an effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

[Effects obtained by sub game stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 8-4, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. Do not perform control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, since the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state, the variation pattern designation command Does not execute control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command while being controlled to the setting change state. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, and thus the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, since the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening designation command even when the special winning opening opening designation command is received while being controlled to the setting change state, The control based on the reception of the special winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, since the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening specifying command even if the special winning opening opening specifying command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state, The control based on the reception of the special winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning a prize port designation command and the second starting winning a prize port designation command while being controlled to the setting change state. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning a prize opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning a prize designation command and the second start winning a prize designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning a prize port designation command and the second starting winning a prize port designation command while being controlled to the setting confirmation state. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning a prize opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning a prize designation command and the second start winning a prize designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled to the setting change state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. In this way, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, the production control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but thereafter discards the received command as in 40FS021. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, since the received command is discarded and no information remains, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting change state is set, and the reception of the setting value confirmation start notification command Based on the above, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting confirmation state is set is made. By doing so, it is possible to show that the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if the irregular display command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5 or the like. It is possible to prevent the predetermined rendering means from malfunctioning.

As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 8D, control is executed according to the test command even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. With this configuration, even when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, it is possible to execute the operation of the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command.

[Examples of launch promotion effects that can suggest settings]
Next, with respect to the characteristic portions 102F and 103F, an example of an effect capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (setting change suggestion effect, setting value suggestion effect) in the launch promotion effect will be described.

FIG. 8-5 is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of an effect capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (setting change suggestion effect, setting value suggestion effect) in the launch promotion effect when a big hit occurs. In FIG. 8-5, the state of the right-handed ramp 102F001 is also shown.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(A), variable display of decorative patterns is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At that time, the right-handed lamp 102F001 is turned off because the left-handed lamp needs to be left-handed. When it is determined by the CPU 103 that the started variable display is to be a big hit, the “left”, “middle”, “middle” and “middle” on the image display device 5 after the change time designated by the change pattern command has elapsed. The decoration pattern of "right" is stopped and displayed with the same design, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed.

After the jackpot display result is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), the characters “big hit!” are displayed on the image display device 5 as a fanfare effect. At that time, the right-handed lamp lighting designation command is transmitted, and the right-handed lamp 102F001 is turned on. The lighting state of the right-handed lamp 102F001 is continued during the big hit game state.

After that, the first basic right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5(C), the setting change suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5(C1), and the first set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5(C2). According to one of the effect modes, a right-handed effect is executed as a firing promotion effect that notifies right-handedness. As a result, it is possible to promote right-handed firing in the big hit game state for the player.

The first basic right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5(C) is a right-handing effect that does not accompany the setting change suggesting effect and the first set value suggesting effect. The setting change suggesting right-handing effect shown in FIG. 8-5 (C1) is a right-handing effect accompanied by the setting change suggesting effect. The first set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C2) is a right-handing effect accompanied by the set value suggesting effect.

In the first basic right-handling effect of FIG. 8-5(C), the basic right-handling image 102F002 at the start of the big hit in which the character "right-handed" is shown in one large rightward arrow is displayed in the center of the screen. It The color of the arrow of the first basic right-handed image 102F002 at the start of the big hit is the basic color white.

In the setting change suggestion right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C1), setting change suggestion in which the color of the first basic right-handing image 102F002 shown in the first basic right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5(C) is gold or black The right-handed image 102F003 is displayed. In the setting change suggesting right striking effect, the possibility that the setting has been changed is suggested by the color of the setting change suggesting right striking image 102F003.

In the first set value suggesting right striking effect of FIG. 8-5(C2), the color of the first basic right striking image 102F002 shown in the first basic right striking effect of FIG. 8-5(C) is changed to blue, green, or red. The first set value suggesting right-handed image 102F004 is displayed. In the first set value suggesting right striking effect, the color of the first set value suggesting right striking image 102F004 indicates which set value the set value is set to.

When a predetermined time elapses after the right striking effect of any of FIGS. 8-5 to (C2) is executed, such right striking effect ends. Then, a predetermined effect image corresponding to the round game of each round in the big hit game state is displayed. At that time, as a right-handed effect, a relatively small right-handed image is displayed at a position that does not disturb the round game, such as the upper right corner of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(D), at the end of the big hit game state, the characters "big hit end" are displayed on the image display device 5. At that time, the right hitting lamp 102F001 is turned on because it is necessary to continue the right hitting by controlling to the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state after the big hit game state ends. The right-handed lamp 102F001 may be turned off once at the end of the big hit game state and then turned on at the start of execution of control to the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state.

FIG. 8-6 is a setting suggestion in the launch promotion performance executed in each of the high-accurate high-base state after the jackpot game state of the probability variation big hit and the low-accurate high-base state after the jackpot game state of the normal jackpot. It is a display screen diagram of the image display device 5 showing an example of an effect capable of executing an effect (setting value suggestion effect). In FIG. 8-6, the state of the right-handed ramp 102F001 is also shown.

As shown in FIG. 8-6(A), after the production at the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 8-5(D) is executed, 100 times variable after the jackpot game state of the probability variation jackpot is finished. In the display, the time saving control of the variable display in the high accurate high base state is executed. In addition, after the big hit game state of the normal big hit, in the variable display of 100 times, the time saving control of the variable display in the low accurate high base state is executed.

At the start of control of the time saving state (high accurate high base state) in the probability changing state, the character string “probability fluctuation rush 100 times” is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-6(B). As a result, it is informed that 100 time-saving fluctuations will be executed in the probability variation state. At that time, the right-handed lamp 102F001 is turned on. Such a lighting state of the right-handed lamp 102F001 is continued during the high accuracy and high base state. On the other hand, at the start of control in the time saving state (low accurate high base state) in the non-probable change state, the character string “Chance time inrush 100 times” is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-6(C). To be done. As a result, it is informed that 100 time-saving fluctuations will be executed in the non-probability variation state. At that time, the right-handed lamp 102F001 is turned on. Such a lighting state of the right-handed lamp 102F001 is continued during the low accurate high base state.

After that, the firing for notifying the right hit is performed by one of the second basic right-handing effect of FIG. 8-6(D) and the second set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-6(D1). A right-handed production as a promotion production is executed. As a result, it is possible to promote right-handed firing in the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state for the player.

The second basic right-handing effect shown in FIG. 8-6(D) is a right-handing effect without setting change suggesting effect and setting value suggesting effect. The second set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-6 (D1) is a right-handing effect accompanied by the set-value suggesting effect.

In the second basic right-handing effect of FIG. 8-6(D), at the start of the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, a plurality of (three) medium-sized rightward arrows (three consecutive arrows) and above them. A second basic right-handed image 102F005 composed of the characters "right-handed" shown in Fig. 2 is displayed in the center of the screen. The color of the arrow of the second basic right-handed image 102F005 at the start of the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state is the basic color white.

In the second set value suggesting right striking effect of FIG. 8-6(D1), the color of the second basic right striking image 102F005 shown in the second basic right striking effect of FIG. 8-6(D) is changed to blue, green, or red. The second set value suggesting right-handed image 102F006 is displayed. In the second set value suggesting right striking effect, the color of the second set value suggesting right striking image 102F006 indicates which set value the set value is set to.

When a predetermined time elapses after the right striking effect of FIG. 8-6 (D) or (D1) is executed, such right striking effect ends. Then, when the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state is started, the third basic right-handing effect of FIG. 8-6(E) and the third set value suggesting right-handing of FIG. 8-6(E1). Depending on one of the effect modes, the right-handing effect as a launch promotion effect for informing the right-handing is executed. As a result, it is possible to promote right-handed firing in the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state for the player.

The third basic right-handing effect in FIG. 8-6(E) is a right-handing effect without setting change suggesting effect and setting value suggesting effect. The third set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-6 (E1) is a right-handing effect accompanied by the set value suggesting effect.

In the third basic right-handing effect of FIG. 8-6(E), one small right-pointing arrow and the word “right-handing” shown on the left side are displayed in the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. A third basic right-handed image 102F007 consisting of is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The color of the arrow of the third basic right-handling image 102F007 in the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state is the basic color white.

In the third set value suggesting right striking effect of FIG. 8-6(E1), the color of the third basic right striking image 102F007 shown in the third basic right striking effect of FIG. 8-6(E) is changed to blue, green, or red. The third set value suggesting right-handed image 102F008 is displayed. In the third set value suggesting right striking effect, the color of the third set value suggesting right striking image 102F008 indicates which set value the set value is set to.

At the end of control in the time saving state (high accurate high base state) in the probability changing state, the character string “probability change end” is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-6(F). As a result, it is notified that the execution of the 100 time saving fluctuations in the probability changing state is completed. At that time, the right-handed lamp 102F001 is turned on. On the other hand, at the time of ending the control of the time saving state (low accurate high base state) in the non-probability change state, the character string "opportunity time end" is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in Fig. 8-6(G). .. As a result, it is notified that the execution of 100 time-saving fluctuations in the non-probability change state has ended. At that time, the right-handed lamp 102F001 is turned on.

After that, as a firing promotion effect for notifying the left-handed hit by any one of the basic left-handed effect shown in FIG. 8-6(H) and the set value suggesting left-handed effect shown in FIG. 8-6(H1). Left-handed production is executed. As a result, it is possible to promote the left-handed firing in the low accurate low base state for the player.

The basic left-handing effect of FIG. 8-6(H) is a right-handing effect without setting change suggesting effect and setting value suggesting effect. The set value suggestive left-handing effect of FIG. 8-6 (H1) is a left-handing effect accompanied by the set value suggesting effect.

In the basic left-handing effect shown in FIG. 8-6(H), at the end of the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, that is, at the start of the low-accuracy low base state, one large left-pointing arrow indicates " The basic left-handed image 102F009 at the start of the jackpot in which the character "left-handed" is displayed is displayed in the center of the screen. The color of the arrow in the basic left-hand hit image 102F009 at the start of the jackpot is the basic color white.

In the setting value suggesting left-handing effect of FIG. 8-6 (H1), the setting value suggesting left-handing in which the color of the basic right-handling image 102F009 shown in the basic left-handing effect of FIG. 8-6(H) is blue, green, or red The image 102F010 is displayed. In the setting value suggesting left-handed rendering, the color of the setting value suggesting left-handed image 102F010 indicates which setting value the setting value is set to. The right-handed lamp 102F002 is turned off by transmitting the right-handed lamp extinguishing designation command that specifies turning off the right-handed lamp 102F002.

[Example of data table that enables setting suggestion in launch promotion production]
Next, in order to execute the setting change suggestion effect and the setting value suggestion effect, how to enable the setting change suggestion effect and the setting value suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6 is executed. An explanation will be given using a data table used for.

In the effect control CPU 120 of FIG. 8-5 (C1), after the CPU 120 for effect control selects and determines using the data table whether or not to execute such an effect, if it is determined to execute, It can be executed by selecting and determining the type of effect to be executed from a plurality of kinds of effects using a data table.

In addition, the first set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C2), the second set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (D1), and the third set value suggesting right of FIG. 8-5 (E1). The hitting effect and the set value suggesting left hitting effect in FIG. 8-5 (H1) are selected and decided for each effect using the data table, and then decided to be executed. Then, the type of effect to be executed can be executed by selecting and determining from a plurality of kinds of effects using the data table.

[Example of data table for determining presence/absence of execution of setting change suggestion effect and setting value suggestion effect]
FIG. 8-7 is a diagram showing a data table used for determining whether or not to execute the setting change effect and various setting value suggesting effects.

The setting change suggesting effect is set such that the ratio of execution is different between the right hitting effect in the first big hit after the setting change and the right hitting effect in the big hit after the first big hit.

FIG. 8-7(A1) shows a first setting change suggestion effect presence/absence determination table used for selectively deciding whether or not to execute the setting change suggestion effect at the time of right hitting effect in the first big hit after the setting change. It is a figure. FIG. 8-7 (A2) is a second setting change suggestion effect presence/absence determination used to selectively determine whether or not to execute the setting change suggestion effect at the time of right hitting effect after the first big hit after the setting change. It is a figure which shows a table.

In each of FIGS. 8-7 (A1) and (A2), the extracted value of the random number SR2 (numerical value range of 0 to 799) for determining the setting suggestion effect execution among the effect random numbers updated by the effect control CPU 120. , “Setting change suggestive effect execution is performed” and “Setting change suggestive effect execution is not performed”. In each of FIGS. 8-7 (A1) and (A2), how many of the 800 numeric data of 0 to 799 are allocated regarding the allocation of the SR2 setting change suggestion production execution presence/absence. It is shown.

In the first setting change suggestion effect presence/absence determination table of FIG. 8-7(A1), “setting change suggestion effect execution existence” is selected as compared with the second setting change suggestion effect presence/absence determination table of FIG. 8-7(A2). The data is set so that the rate of being performed is high. In the second setting change suggestion effect presence/absence determination table, at a predetermined ratio different from the first setting change suggestion effect presence/absence determination table so that the setting change suggestion effect can be executed in the big hit after the first big hit after the setting change. The data may be set so that “presence of effect of setting change suggestion” can be selected.

FIG. 8-7 (B1) is a first setting used for selectively determining whether or not to execute the first set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C2) that can be executed at the time of big hitting right-handing effect. It is a figure showing a value suggestion production existence determination table. FIG. 8-7 (B2) executes the second set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (D1) that can be executed at the start of time saving control in the probability variation state and at the start of time saving control in the non-probability variation state. It is a figure which shows the 2nd setting value suggestion production|presentation presence/absence determination table used in order to select and determine whether to do.

FIG. 8-7 (B3) shows whether or not to execute the third set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (E1) which can be executed during the time saving control in the probability changing state and during the time saving control in the non-probability changing state. It is a figure which shows the 3rd setting value suggestion production|presentation presence/absence determination table used in order to selectively determine whether or not. FIG. 8-7 (B4) shows whether or not to execute the set value suggestion left-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (H1) which can be executed at the time of ending the time saving control in the probability changing state and when ending the time saving control in the non-probability changing state. It is a figure which shows the 4th setting value suggestion production presence/absence determination table used for selecting and determining.

In each of FIGS. 8-7 (B1) to (B4), the extracted value of the random number SR2 for determining whether or not the setting suggestion effect has been executed, and “the setting value suggestion effect execution is present” and “the setting value suggestion effect execution is not performed”. The selection relationship with each is shown.

In the first set value suggestion effect presence/absence determination table to the fourth set value suggestion effect presence/absence determination table in FIGS. 8-7 (B1) to (B4), the ratios in which “set value suggestive effect execution is performed” are different. The data is set. As a result, the first set value suggestive effect, the second set value suggestive effect, the third set value suggestive effect, and the fourth set value suggestive effect are executed at different rates. Therefore, the rate at which the set value suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the game state.

[Example of data table for setting change suggestion production type selection]
FIG. 8-8 is a diagram showing a setting change suggestion effect type selection table used for selecting and determining the type of setting change suggestion effect.

In FIG. 8-8, when the setting is changed (“changed”) and when the setting is not changed (“unchanged”), the effect control random number updated by the effect control CPU 120 is divided. Of these, the extracted value of the setting suggestion effect (including the setting change suggestion effect and the setting value suggestion) type determination random number SR3 (the numerical range of 0 to 99) and the “golden right hitting effect” and the “black right hitting effect”. A selection relationship with various setting change suggestion production types is shown. FIG. 8-8 shows how many pieces of data among 100 pieces of numerical data of 0 to 99 are allocated to the SR3 setting change suggestion effect type.

The “golden right-handing effect” of FIG. 8-8 is an effect of displaying the setting change suggesting right-handing image 102F003 in gold in the setting change suggesting right-handing effect as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C1). The “black right hitting effect” of FIG. 8-8 is an effect of displaying the setting change suggesting right hitting image 102F003 in black in the setting change suggesting right hitting effect of FIG. 8-5 (C1).

In the setting change suggestion effect type selection table of FIG. 8-8, the ratio of selecting “golden right hitting effect” is higher in the case of “with change” than in the case of “without change”, and in the case of “without change” The data is set so that the ratio of selecting “black right hitting effect” is higher than that in the case of “changed”. As a result, in the case where the setting change suggestion effect is executed, when the “golden right hitting effect” is executed, the height of the ratio at which the setting is changed by selecting the color type of the setting change suggesting right hitting image 102F003. Can be suggested to the player.

[Example of data table for setting value suggestion production type selection]
Each of FIG. 8-9 and FIG. 8-10 is a diagram showing a set value suggestion effect type selection table used for selecting and determining the type of the set value suggestion effect for each game state. FIG. 8-9(A) shows a jackpot setting value suggestive effect type selection table. FIG. 8-9(B) shows a set value suggesting effect type selection table at the start of the probability variation etc. FIG. 8-10(C) shows a set value suggesting effect type selection table during execution of probability change or the like. FIG. 8-10(D) shows a set value suggesting effect type selection table at the end of the probability change or the like.

In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, the setting suggestion type determination random number is divided into a set value 1, a set value 2, and a set value 3. Extracted value of SR3 (numerical value range of 0 to 99) and "blue right-handed production" or "blue left-handed production", "green right-handed production" or "green left-handed production", and "red right-handed production". Alternatively, a selection relationship with a set value suggestion effect type such as “red left-handed effect” is shown. FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10 show how many pieces of data out of 100 pieces of numerical data 0 to 99 are allocated to the SR3 setting value suggestion effect type. There is.

8-9 (A), (B) and 8-10 (C) in each table, "blue right-handed effect", Fig. 8-5 (C2), Fig. 8-6 (D1), Fig. 8 In the setting value suggesting right hitting effect in each game state such as -6 (E1), the setting value suggesting right hitting images 102F004, 102F006, 102F008 are displayed in blue. 8-9 (A), (B) and 8-10 (C) in each table "green right hit production" is "set right suggestion right setting value in each game state" described "blue right hit production" In the effect, the setting value suggesting right-handed images 102F004, 102F006, 102F008 are displayed in green. 8-9 (A), (B) and 8-10 (C) shown in each table "red right hitting effect", "blue right hitting effect" described in each game state setting value suggest right hitting In the effect, the setting value suggesting right-handed images 102F004, 102F006, 102F008 are displayed in red.

In the table shown in FIG. 8-10(D), the "blue left-handed effect" is the set value suggestive left-handed image 102F010 in blue in the set value suggestive left-handed effect in the gaming state as shown in FIG. 8-6(H1). It is a display to be displayed. The "green left hitting effect" in FIG. 8-9(D) is an effect of displaying the set value suggesting left hitting image 102F010 in green in the set value suggesting left hitting effect in the game state described for the "blue left hitting effect". is there. The "red left-handing effect" in FIG. 8-9(D) is an effect of displaying the setting value suggesting left-handing image 102F010 in red in the setting value suggesting left-handing effect in the game state described for the "blue left-handing effect". is there.

In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, in the firing promotion effects such as the right-handed effect and the left-handed effect, when the set value is 1, the ratio in which blue is selected is the highest. When the value is 2, the green color is most selected, and when the setting value is 3, the red color is most selected. As a result, for the set value suggesting right-handed images 102F004, 102F006, 102F008, and the set value suggesting left-handed image 102F004, the effect of suggesting the current set value by the image color is executed.

[Example of processing for executing setting suggestion production]
[Setting change suggestion]
The setting suggestion effect including the setting change suggestion effect and the setting value suggestion effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120. For example, the setting change suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C1) is the time of starting before the right-handing effect at the start of the big hit in the big hit medium effect processing (S176) in the effect control process of FIG. Check whether or not the setting change end notification command (see FIG. 8-2) is received, and whether or not the big hit game state executed this time is the first big hit after the setting change (for example, By providing a counter that counts the number of times the big hit game state is executed, and confirming how many big hits it has after starting by checking the count value.), at the time of right-handed directing at the first big hit after changing the setting It is determined whether or not there is a right hitting effect in the big hit after the first big hit after the setting change. Then, based on the determination result, the setting change suggestion effect presence/absence determination table of (A1) or (A2) of FIG. 8-7 is selected, the value of SR2 is extracted, and the setting is performed based on the extracted value of SR2. It is determined whether to execute the change suggestion effect.

Whether or not the setting change end notification command is received at startup is set in the command analysis process (S75) of FIG. 6 when the command is received, and the setting change end notification command reception flag is set. It may be determined by checking whether it is set.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the value of SR3, confirms whether or not the setting has been changed, and based on the extracted value of SR3, the setting change suggestion effect type selection table of FIG. 8-8. The type (color) of the setting change suggesting effect is selected and determined by using. In that case, whether or not the setting has been changed is confirmed by checking whether or not the setting change end notification command has been received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1 is started. .. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting change suggestion effect, and when the type (color) of the setting change suggestion effect to be executed is determined, in the big hit medium effect process (S176), the big hit. When executing the right-handing effect at the start, the setting change right-handing effect as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C1) is executed with the effect of the decided type (color).

[Set value suggestion]
For example, the first set value suggestive right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C2) is, before performing the right-handing effect at the start of the big hit, in the big hit medium effect processing (S176) in the effect control process of FIG. Select the first set value suggestion effect presence/absence determination table in (B1) of FIG. 8-7, extract the value of SR2, and execute the set value suggestion effect at the start of the big hit based on the extracted value of SR2. Decide whether or not.

When it is determined to execute the set value suggesting effect at the time of jackpot start, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the value of SR3, confirms the current set value, and based on the extracted value of SR3, The type (color) of the set value suggestive effect is selected and determined using the set value suggestive effect type selection table at the time of jackpot 8-9 (A). In that case, the confirmation of the current set value may be performed as follows. Check whether or not the setting value designation command (see FIG. 8-2) that can specify the changed setting value (setting value 2 or setting value 3) output when the setting value is changed at startup is received, If received, the changed set value specified by the received command is confirmed. When the production control CPU 120 receives the set value designation command, it recognizes the changed set value specified by the command as the current set value, and when it does not receive the set value designation command, it sets the default of the set value. The setting value 1 which is a value is recognized as the current setting value.

Whether or not the setting value designation command is received at the time of start is determined by setting the setting value designation command reception flag when the command is received in the command analysis processing (S75) of FIG. It may be determined by checking whether or not Further, when the set value designation command is received, in the command analysis process (S75) of FIG. 6, the changed set value data indicating the set value specified by the received set value designation command is stored in the changed set value data storage of the RAM 122. It should be stored in the department. By performing such a treatment, the effect control CPU 120 can easily recognize the current set value.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the set value incentive effect at the time of big hit, and when the type (color) of the set value inducing effect to be executed is determined, the effect process during the big hit (S176). In executing the right hitting effect at the start of the big hit, the first set value suggesting right hitting effect as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C1) is executed with the effect of the determined type (color).

Further, for example, the second set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-6 (D1) is the special symbol normal process (S110) in the effect control process of FIG. 7, at the start of the probability variation state and the time saving state, or At the start of the probability change state and the time saving state, the second set value suggestion effect presence/absence determination table in (B2) of FIG. 8-7 is selected, the value of SR2 is extracted, and the set value is set based on the extracted value of SR2. It is determined whether or not the suggestive effect is executed.

When it is determined to execute the set value suggesting effect at the start of the probability changing state and the time saving state, or at the time of starting the non-estimate changing state and the time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the value of SR3, and the present time. Of the set value suggestion production is selected using the set value suggestion production type selection table at the start of the probability variation etc. of FIG. 8-9B based on the extracted value of SR3. decide. In that case, the confirmation of the current set value is performed in the same manner as in the case of the set value suggesting effect at the start of the big hit described above, and the effect control CPU 120 recognizes the current set value.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the set value inducing effect at the start of the probable variation state and the time saving state, or at the start of the non-probable variation state and the time saving state, and executes the set value inducing effect. When the type (color) is determined, in the big hit medium effect process (S176), at the time of starting the probability changing state and the time saving state, or when executing the right hitting effect at the time of starting the non-probability changing state and the time saving state, The second set value suggesting right-handing effect as shown in FIG. 8-6 (D1) is executed with the effect of the determined type (color).

Further, for example, the third set value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-6 (E1) is the special symbol normal process (S110) in the effect control process of FIG. 7, during the execution of the probability variation state and the time saving state, or During execution of the probability variation state and the time saving state, the third set value suggestion effect presence/absence determination table in (B3) of FIG. 8-7 is selected, the value of SR2 is extracted, and the set value is set based on the extracted value of SR2. It is determined whether or not the suggestive effect is executed.

When it is determined to execute the set value suggestion effect during execution of the probability variation state and the time saving state, or during execution of the non-estimation state and the time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the value of SR3 and presently Of the set value suggestion production is selected by using the set value suggestion production type selection table during execution of the probability variation of FIG. 8-10C based on the extracted value of SR3. decide. In that case, the confirmation of the current set value is performed in the same manner as in the case of the set value suggesting effect at the start of the big hit described above, and the effect control CPU 120 recognizes the current set value.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the set value inducing effect during execution of the probability variation state and the time saving state, or in the execution of the non-probability variation state and time saving state, and executes the set value inducing effect. When the type (color) is determined, the probability changes in the special symbol normal process (S110), the variable display start setting process (S171), the variable display effect process (S172), and the special symbol hit waiting process (S173). 8-6 (E1) with an effect of a determined type (color) when executing the right-handing effect during execution of the state and the time saving state, or during execution of the non-probable variation state and the time saving state. 3 Set value suggestion Right-handed production is executed.

Further, for example, the set value suggesting left-handed effect of FIG. 8-6 (H1) is the special symbol normal process (S110) in the effect control process of FIG. 7, immediately after the end of the probability variation state and the time saving state, or the non-determination state. Immediately after the end of the time saving state, the fourth set value suggestion effect presence/absence determination table in (B4) of FIG. 8-7 is selected, the value of SR2 is extracted, and the set value suggestion effect is generated based on the extracted value of SR2. Decide whether to execute.

When it is determined to execute the set value suggestion effect immediately after the end of the probability variation state and the time saving state, or immediately after the end of the non-probability variation state and the time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the value of SR3, and the current value is set. Of the set value suggestion production is selected using the set value suggestion production type selection table at the end of the probability change of FIG. 8-10 (D) based on the extracted value of SR3. decide. In that case, the confirmation of the current set value is performed in the same manner as in the case of the set value suggesting effect at the start of the big hit described above, and the effect control CPU 120 recognizes the current set value.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the set value inducing effect immediately after the end of the probability variation state and the time saving state, or immediately after the end of the non-probability change state and time saving state, and executes the set value inducing effect. When the type (color) is determined, in the special symbol normal process (S110), immediately after the end of the probability changing state and the time saving state, or when performing the left striking effect immediately after the end of the non-probability changing state and the time saving state, With the effect of the determined type (color), the set value suggesting left-handed effect as shown in FIG. 8-6 (H1) is executed.

[Other operation promotion notification]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of FIG. 8-1, the game ball is launched to the left hitting route in the low-probability low base state, and the game ball is moved to the right-handing route in accordance with the high-probability high base and the low-probability high base game state. The game to fire is performed. When such a game ball is distributed and launched, even if a game ball is launched to the right-handed route in a low-probability low-base state, there is no particular benefit to the player, and in the low-probability low-base state in game control as well. The game control corresponding to the act of launching the game ball to the right-handed route is not particularly executed. Therefore, in the configuration in which the passing gate 41 is provided on the right-hand side path side as shown in FIG. 8A, when the right-handing is not necessary as in the low accuracy low base state, the right-hand side of the passing gate 41 is provided. A configuration may be adopted in which when the gate switch detects the passage of the gaming machine to the passage gate 41, a left-handed production is executed as the operation promotion display presentation.

In the case of adopting such a configuration, the operation promotion display effect executed when the right gate switch provided in the passage gate 41 detects passage of the gaming machine to the passage gate 41 is shown in FIG. Unlike the above), the setting suggestion effect may be controlled not to be executed.

[Applicable range of the characteristic part 103F]
Regarding the characteristic portion 103F, in a pachinko gaming machine capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, a predetermined value is included corresponding to a change in the gaming state including a launch promotion effect. The example has been described in which, when the operation promotion effect for promoting the operation can be executed, the operation promotion effect can be executed in the mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means. In addition, as the operation promotion effect, a predetermined bet number is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the symbols according to the operation of the stop button by the player. When the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the game is stopped, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART , CZ (hereinafter, referred to as a bonus, etc.) may be applied to an operation promotion effect in a slot machine equipped with one or more.

For example, in the image display section of the slot machine, in the bonus confirmation screen showing that the bonus, which is an advantageous state such as a big bonus and a regular bonus, which is advantageous for the player, has been confirmed, the push symbol is notified to display the bonus type. The setting suggestion effect (setting change suggestion effect, setting value suggestion effect) may be performed according to the display mode of the image showing the stop button which is the operation member when displaying.

Further, in the image display section of the slot machine, it is an operation member when displaying a push order navigation effect of the stop button during AT and ART (an effect of navigating the order of operation), which is an advantageous state advantageous for the player. The setting suggestion effect (setting change suggestion effect, setting value suggestion effect) may be performed according to the display mode of the image showing the stop button.

Further, in the image display section of the slot machine, in the internal winning state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player, a continuous effect for leading to such an advantageous state (for example, repeating the battle effect and the like, and performing a button operation a plurality of times). Setting suggestion effect (setting change suggestion effect, setting value suggestion effect) may be performed in accordance with the display mode of the button image showing the operation member such as the button image displayed in the effect.

In addition, when an image corresponding to the operation lever is displayed on the image display unit of the slot machine when performing an operation for promoting the operation of the operation lever that is the operation member of the slot machine, the setting is made according to the display mode of the image. Suggestive production (setting change suggestive production, set value suggestive production) may be performed.

As described above, also for various operation members provided in the slot machine, setting suggestion effect (setting change suggestion effect, setting value suggestion effect) is performed using the image corresponding to the hitting ball operation handle 30 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. The effect as described above may be executable. In addition, regarding the pachinko gaming machine 1, various buttons (push buttons and the like) provided as operating members other than the hitting ball operating handle 30, jog tires, and other operating members such as various lever members are also displayed with corresponding images. It may be displayed and the setting suggestion effect (setting change suggestion effect, setting value suggestion effect) as described above may be performed.

[Main effects obtained by the characteristic portions 102F and 103F]
[1] Setting change suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C1), first setting value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C2), second setting value suggesting right-handing of FIG. 8-6 (D1) Setting as shown in the production, the right-handed production that performs the third set value suggesting right-handed production of FIG. 8-6 (E1), the left-handed production that performs the set-value suggestion left-handed production of FIG. 8-6 (H1), and the like. The firing promotion effect can be executed by a mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the means. As a result, it is possible to make the game more interesting by suggesting the setting means.

[2] Setting change suggestive right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C1), first setting value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C2), second setting value suggesting right-handing of FIG. 8-6 (D1) Setting as shown in the production, the right-handed production that performs the third set value suggesting right-handed production of FIG. 8-6 (E1), the left-handed production that performs the set-value suggestion left-handed production of FIG. 8-6 (H1), and the like. The launch promotion effect (operation promotion effect) can be executed in a mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the means. As a result, it is possible to make the game more interesting by suggesting the setting means.

[3] In FIG. 8-7, left-handedness such as the execution ratio of the set value suggestion performance is different between the right-handed productions of (A1), (A2), (B1) and (B2) and the left-handed production of (B3) The rate of executing the launch promotion effect (operation promotion effect) in the mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means is different between the launch promotion effect of No. 2 and the right-handed launch promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to diversify the type and frequency of the effect that suggests the setting means, and to further enhance the interest in the game.

[4] As shown in FIG. 8-6 (H1), when the advantageous state such as the probable variation state and the time saving state ends, it is possible to make a suggestion regarding the setting means in the predetermined firing promotion effect (operation promotion effect). Is. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution time of the effect that makes a suggestion regarding the setting means, and it is possible to make the game even more interesting.

[5] As shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, in the right-handing effect by the right-handing display images 102F002 to 102F010, a setting change effect or a set value suggesting effect can be executed, but the right-handing lamp 102F001 is turned on. Then, the setting change effect or the set value suggestion effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the type and frequency of the effect that suggests the setting means, and to further enhance the interest in the game.

[6] As shown in FIG. 8-7 and the like, the ratio of executing the launch promotion effect (operation promotion effect) according to the mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means is different depending on the type of the game state, and thus the setting means is related. It is possible to diversify the type and frequency of the suggested performance, and to further enhance the interest in the game.

[7] As shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A1), (A2), etc., when the set value is changed, when the jackpot game state is first controlled, and thereafter, the jackpot game state is controlled. The time and the ratio of executing the launch promotion effect (operation promotion effect) according to the mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means are different. As a result, when the set value is changed, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the timing in which the setting is controlled to the advantageous state and the frequency of the effect that suggests the setting means, and it is possible to make the game even more exciting. it can.

[8] When the advantageous state shifts from the first advantageous state (big hit game state) to the second advantageous state (probability change state, time saving state, etc.) as shown by the triple arrow in FIG. 8-8 (D1) It is possible to execute the launch promotion effect (operation promotion effect) in a special mode in a mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the types of effects that suggest the setting means, and to further enhance the interest in the game.

[9] As described in [Other operation promotion notification], in a normal time (low accurate low base state), it is not necessary to pass the game ball to the gate, and the game medium is shot to the right-handed path. In a game state that is not necessary, when a game medium is detected in a specific route, a predetermined launch effect such as left-handed effect can be executed, and when the predetermined launch effect is performed in the game state, a set value suggestion effect Do not run. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously identifying an unintended game as an intended game.

[Other Modifications of Characteristic Parts 102F and 103F]

[1] The advantageous states that are advantageous to the player include a high-probability state (probability variation state), a time saving state, and other advantageous states such as a high base state, in addition to the above-described big hit game state. Further, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player may include a state where a small hit can frequently occur such as a so-called small hit rush state and the exit can be obtained by the small hit.

[2] As the set value in the above-described embodiment, an example in which there are three kinds of setting steps of set value 1 to set value 3 is shown as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, there are six setting steps of setting values 1 to 6 and the like, and setting steps of setting values larger than three kinds of setting values 1 to 3 are set. Good.

[3] In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect is different for each of a plurality of types of game states such as when the big hit starts, the probability variation state and the time reduction state start, and the probability variation state and the time reduction state execution. Regarding such a game state, there are a plurality of game states such as a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a probability change state, and a so-called small hit rush state, and the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on those game states. You may do it.

[4] In the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect for the gaming machine (so-called first-type gaming machine) that shifts to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol. Although the example has been described, the jackpot game state is established based on the fact that the game ball has won (V prize) in the specific prize hole (V prize hole) in the variable prize ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area. The setting suggestion effect may be executable in a game machine to be transferred (a so-called second type game machine) or a game machine in which the first type and the second type are combined. In such a gaming machine, in a gaming state in which a game ball needs to be won in a specific winning opening (V winning opening), a launch promotion effect for a winning in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) is executed, and In the effect, the setting suggestion effect as described above may be executable.

[5] In the gaming machine in which the first type and the second type described above are combined, in order to accumulate the reserved memory due to the start winning, the launch promotion effect for promoting the launch of the gaming machine to the specific area may be executed. However, the setting suggestion effect as described above may be executable in the effect.

[6] As an example in which the setting suggesting effect can be executed, after a variation display result is derived and displayed as a probability variation big hit, a specific area (V area) provided in the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is set. In the gaming machine in which the probability variation state control of the probability variation determination device type (so-called V probability variation type) is executed when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed, a specific region (V region) ) May be executed, and the setting suggestion effect as described above may be executed in the effect.

[7] In the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which, of the setting suggestion effects, the setting change suggestion effects can be executed only for some game states. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change suggestion effect may be executable for all the game states in which the set value suggestion effect is executed, and one of all the game states in which the set value suggestion effect is executed. It may be possible to execute the game status of a part.

[8] At the start of the big hit game state, the emission promotion effect is executed by controlling the light emitting body such as the LED provided corresponding to the special variable winning ball device (big winning opening) to be opened. In the gaming machine, the setting suggestion effect may be executable depending on the light emitting mode (lighting, blinking, light emitting color, etc.) of the light emitting body.

[9] As mentioned above. In the example, the right-handed lamp 102F001 does not allow the setting suggestion effect to be executed. Similarly, in the gaming machine capable of displaying the special symbol variable display state and the right hit state by the light emission of the plurality of segment LEDs controlled by the CPU 103 on the game control side, in addition to the right hit state by the light emission of the segment LED You may perform the control which does not perform setting suggestion production. This makes it difficult for the player to mistakenly recognize the segment LED emission state.

[10] The effect control for executing the setting suggestion effect in the above-mentioned launch promotion effect (operation promotion effect) is executed in combination with the setting suggestion effect executed by displaying the specific image on the image display device 5 during the variable display. Alternatively, it may be executed in combination with a setting suggestion effect executed by displaying a special image on the image display device 5 during the big hit game state after the variable display is stopped. Moreover, you may perform setting suggestion production combined with these both productions.
(Explanation regarding the association of the characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic part may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic part. The feature parts combined in this way or the individual feature parts that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to other feature parts.

The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the later-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be understood that the above-described embodiments disclosed herein and the embodiments described later are examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description, but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

In addition, as the gaming machine of the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing games using operation members (gaming handle 30, lever, stop button, etc.),
Setting means (CPU 103 or the like) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 3 or the like) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
A game control means (CPU 103 or the like) capable of controlling in a plurality of types of game states (big hit game state, probability variation state, time saving state, etc.) including an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
Corresponding to the change in the game state, operation promotion effect that promotes a predetermined operation (right hit effect, left hit effect, start switch operation notification, stop button operation notification, etc. in FIG. 8-5, FIG. 8-6, etc.) It is provided with an executable effect executing means (effect control CPU 120, S176, S170 to S173, etc.),
The effect execution means, corresponding to the suggestion (setting change suggestion, setting suggestion) regarding the set value (gold right hitting effect selected in FIG. 8-8, black right hitting effect, FIG. 8-9 and FIG. 8- The operation promotion effect by blue right (left) striking effect, green right (left) striking effect, red right (left) striking effect, navigation display in navi effect, bonus confirming display in bonus confirming effect, etc. selected in 10) Can be executed (setting change suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C1), first setting value suggesting right-handing effect of FIG. 8-5 (C2), second setting value of FIG. 8-6 (D1). Suggested right-handed production, third set value suggested right-handed production of FIG. 8-6 (E1), set value suggestive left-handed production of FIG. 8-6 (H1) left-handed production, set value suggested production in navigation production , Bonus value set production, etc.),
further,
A control unit capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components (for example, a microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and memory contents can be retained even when power supply to a gaming machine is stopped, and information regarding the plurality of electronic components can be stored. Storage means (for example, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D), and the control means writes the information in the storage means when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied. Processing (for example, writing processing by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10) can be executed, and the storage unit corresponds to the storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and the second generation condition. The storage area in which the second information is written is provided as one continuous area (for example, the backup storage area 41AKA1 including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13), and the first generation condition and the second generation condition are satisfied. In this case, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition is not executed (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON). A game machine is mentioned.

According to such a configuration, the operation promotion effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the suggestion regarding the setting means, so that the suggestion regarding the setting means can make the game more exciting. In addition, information can be managed appropriately.

Moreover, you may make it memorize|store the frequency|count of execution of operation promotion production in a memory|storage means. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the execution frequency of the operation promotion effect. Also, it is possible to grasp how many times the game state has changed.

Further, in the case of storing the suggestion regarding the operation promotion effect and the setting in the storage means, the suggestion regarding the operation promotion effect and the setting is stored when the first generation condition or the second occurrence condition occurs and the writing process is being executed. You don't have to remember it. Alternatively, the storage timing may be delayed. By doing so, the load on the control means can be reduced.

Further, in addition to the case of executing the operation promotion effect, when the predetermined execution condition is satisfied during the game, the set value suggestion effect is performed by the display mode of the image display device (effect display device) or the operation mode of the movable body. You may do it. For example, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied (a particular type of big hit occurs, a certain number of times of probability variation big hits continue, a particular type of reach effect or notice effect occurs, etc.), a character is displayed on the image display device, or The movable body is operated, and the display mode of the character and the operation mode of the movable body are selected by lottery or the like from a plurality of types every time a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and the set value of each character is set. By making the selection ratio or the selection ratio of each operation mode different, the more advantageous the set value that is set for the player, the easier the character of a specific type appears when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, or Alternatively, the movable body may be made easier to operate in a specific type of operation mode. By doing so, in addition to the case where the operation promotion effect is executed, the set value suggestion effect is performed when the predetermined execution condition is satisfied during the game, so that the interest of the game can be further improved. ..

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can improve interest and manage information appropriately,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
Control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
And a storage unit capable of retaining stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and storing information regarding the plurality of electronic components (for example, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D).
The control unit executes a writing process (for example, a writing process by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10) for writing the information in the storage unit when an event occurrence condition corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied. Is possible,
In the storage means, a storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written are continuous (for example, a backup storage area). 41 AKA11 to 41 AKA13) as a backup storage unit 41 AKA1), and when the information corresponding to one of the conditions is executed when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied, the other A gaming machine that does not execute the process of writing information corresponding to the condition (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on) is included. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)

FIG. 9 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes a gaming board 902 and a gaming machine frame 903. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame that rotatably supports the gaming machine frame 903. The game board 902 is a gauge board that constitutes a game board surface. The gaming machine frame 903 is an underframe for fixing the gaming board 902. On the game board 902, a game area surrounded by a guide rail or the like is formed. The game ball (game medium) launched from the launch device passes through the launch passage and is driven into the game area. A glass door frame having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 903.

At a predetermined position of the game board 902, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, an image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, A normal symbol display 9020, a first holding display 9025A, a second holding display 9025B, a universal drawing holding display 9025C, a passage gate 9041 and the like are provided. In addition, a windmill, a large number of obstacle nails, a general winning opening, an outlet, and the like may be provided on the game board surface in the game area. A game effect lamp 90909 is provided in the periphery of the game area. Speakers 908L and 908R are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) is provided. The hit ball operation handle is operated by a player or the like to shoot the game ball toward the game area, and the resilience of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount (rotation amount). At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the game area, an upper plate (hit ball supply plate) that holds (reserves) the game balls and a lower plate (remains) that holds (reserves) surplus balls and the like from the upper plate. A ball storage dish) is provided. A stick controller 9031A is attached to a member forming the lower plate, and a push button 9031B is provided to a member forming the upper plate.

On the screens of the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the image display device 905, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is performed. These variable displays are based on the occurrence of the first start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening formed on the normal winning ball device 906A, or on the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Execution is possible based on the occurrence of the second start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the formed second starting winning opening. The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are respectively configured by using, for example, 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), etc., and are identified in the special symbol game as an example of the variable display game. Special symbols (special symbols) that are information (special identification information) are variably displayed (variably displayed). The image display device 905 is configured by using, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 905, the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 904A in the special symbol game and the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B (the second symbol) Corresponding to each variable display of 2 special symbol or 2nd special symbol), the decorative symbol which is the identification information (decorative identification information) is variable in the decorative symbol display area which is a plurality of variable display parts such as three. Is displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game. As an example, decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" are arranged on the screen of the image display device 905.

A reserved storage display area 905H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. In the hold storage display area 905H, a hold display is displayed that allows a variable display hold number (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the special figure game to be specified. The hold display may be any display that can be displayed in correspondence with the hold storage of information regarding variable display. The hold display using the first hold display 9025A and the second hold display 9025B may be performed together with the hold storage display area 905H or instead of the hold storage display area 905H.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of various substrates and peripheral devices. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a lamp output board 9013, a backup memory board 9014, and an effect data memory board 9016 as shown in FIG. In addition, a relay board 9015, a performance control relay board 9017, an audio output board 9018, a driver board 9019, etc. are also mounted. Further, various boards such as a power board, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board may be mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components are mounted, but also electric components are mounted (mounted) on electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including an electronic circuit mounting board configured as described above.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is possible to supply electric power from an AC power supply, which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electric components including various control boards such as a main board 9011 and a production control board 9012 by a power supply board. Has been done. The power supply board includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V or direct current 5V), and the like. I have it. The power supply voltage generated by the power supply board may be supplied to the main board 9011, the effect control board 9012, etc. via the drawer relay board.

On the main board 9011, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, etc. are mounted. In the main board 9011, signals fetched from various detection switches such as a gate switch 9021, a starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 9022A and second starting opening switch 9022B), and a count switch 9023 are passed through a switch circuit 90110. It is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100. The gate switch 9021 detects a game ball (gate passing ball) that has passed through the passing gate 9041. Based on the detection of the gate passing sphere by the gate switch 9021, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed by the normal symbol display 9020. The first starting opening switch 9022A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A. The second starting port switch 9022B detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the second starting winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The count switch 9023 detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907. When a game ball that has passed through various winning openings such as a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a big winning opening is detected, the number of prize balls determined in advance corresponding to each winning opening As a game ball is paid out.

On the main board 9011, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 is transmitted to a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory and a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door via a solenoid circuit 90111. Solenoid 9081 for the normal electric auditors product, a state in which the game ball does not easily pass (or does not pass) and a state in which it easily passes (or passes) the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. It can be changed to and. The solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door allows the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 907 to be changed between a state in which the game ball cannot pass and a state in which it can pass. From the main board 9011, a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display device 9020, etc. is transmitted.

A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 90101 for storing a game control program and fixed data, and a RAM 90102 for providing a game control work area. , A CPU 90103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 90104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 90105. Prepared for. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011, various random number values used to control the progress of the game are controlled by, for example, a random number circuit 90104 or a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. The numerical data shown is counted (generated) so that it can be updated. The random number used to control the progress of the game is also called a game random number.

On the main board 9011, a setting key 9051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting functioning as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit in the setting change state The changeover switch 9052 is connected. The setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 may be installed at a predetermined position of the main board 9011, or may be attached to the outside of the main board 9011 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board. The setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 903 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the staff in possession can operate it. Since the setting key 9051 requires key operation, only the staff having a key for operating the setting key 9051 can operate among the staff in the game arcade. The setting key 9051 is a switch that can be turned on and off by a predetermined key operation, and is also a switch that can perform an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation.

Various sensors such as a door opening sensor 909090 that detects opening of a glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 902 so as to be openable and closable are connected to the main board 9011, and based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors). The reset signal, the power-off signal, and the clear signal from the power supply board are taken into the switch circuit 90110 of the main board 9011 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100. A display monitor 9029 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 9011, and a display changeover switch 9030 is arranged beside the display monitor 9029. The display monitor 9029 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 9029 and the display changeover switch 9030 are arranged in front of the main board 9011 when the back side of the game board 902 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 903 opened.

The main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) is provided with respective winning openings (first big winning opening, second big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry area". (Also referred to as “”), the number of game balls entering the game is totaled, and various winning information such as the continuous ratio and the winning combination is displayed on the display monitor 9029. By displaying such prize information, it is possible to confirm various prize information such as the consecutive ratio and the winning combination after being installed in the game hall. On the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is usual that the gaming board surface is designed so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. Further, when performing the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 901 is installed, whether or not the adjustment has been made, what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, the game ball enters the general winning opening as often as designed. Is confirmed (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of the adjustment after installation and the contents.

The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 9011, and based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L, 908R. , Game effect lamp 909, staging motor 9060, staging LED 9061, and other staging devices, various circuits for controlling staging operations by various staging electric parts are mounted. The effect control board 9012 displays an image on the image display device 905, outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, lights the light emitting members of the game effect lamp 909 and the effect LED 9061, and moves the effect motor 9060. It is provided with a function of determining control contents for causing the electric parts for performance to execute a predetermined performance operation, such as the driving operation of. On the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 10, electronic components such as an effect control microcomputer 90120, an external ROM 90121, and an external RAM 90121 are mounted.

The effect control board 9012 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting an illumination signal to the lamp output board 9013, and a backup memory board 9014 for backup. Wiring for transmitting a control signal and the like, wiring for transmitting an effect data signal to and from the effect data memory board 9016 are connected. Wirings for transmitting various signals are also connected to the sound output board 9018 and the driver board 9019 via the effect control relay board 9017. The information signal transmitted to the audio output board 9018 may include an audio signal (sound effect signal) that specifies audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The information signal transmitted to the driver board 9019 may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the production movable member by driving the production motor 9060. The information signal transmitted to the driver board 9019 may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting the effect LED 9061. Wiring for receiving the motion detection signal may be connected to the effect control board 9012. The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that the motion of the player using the stick controller 9031A has been detected. The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that the motion of the player using the push button 9031B has been detected.

The lamp output board 9013 is a lamp output board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and a driver IC or the like that supplies a driving current to the game effect lamp 909 or the like in accordance with an illumination signal from the effect control board 9012. Is installed. The backup memory board 9014 is a board for storing backup data that is provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is capable of executing backup data write processing and read processing in accordance with a backup control signal from the effect control board 9012. It is configured. In the backup data writing process, the backup data is written and stored in the backup data memory. In the backup data reading process, the backup data stored in the backup data memory is read and transmitted to the effect control board 9012 or the like. The effect data memory board 9016 is a board for effect data storage provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is configured to be able to execute effect data read processing in accordance with effect data control signals from the effect control board 9012. ing. In the effect data read processing, the effect data stored in the effect data memory is read and transmitted to the effect control board 9012 or the like. An effect data memory capable of storing effect data is mounted on the effect data memory board 9016. In the effect data memory, a storage area for storing various kinds of image data showing a display image on the image display device 905, a storage area for storing various kinds of sound data showing sounds output from the speakers 908L, 908R, and an effect motor 9060. A storage area for storing various motor data indicating the drive control content of, a storage area for storing various light emission data indicating the lighting control content of the game effect lamp 909 and the effect LED 9061, and the like may be provided in advance. The effect data memory may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory such as a NAND ROM, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. What is necessary is just to be comprised.

The effect control relay board 9017 is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 902, and relays various signals transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the sound output board 9018 and the driver board 9019. The back pack may be attached to a central portion on the back surface side of the game board 902, and an opening facing the image display device 905 may be formed in the center thereof. The back pack may be provided so as to cover a part or all of the main board 9011, the lamp output board 9013, the audio output board 9018, and the driver board 9019 from the rear side. An effect control board box in which a part or all of the effect control board 9012, the backup memory board 9014, and the effect data memory board 9016 are housed may be attached to the rear surface side of the back pack. The main board 9011 may be housed in a board case together with a setting key 9051 and a setting changeover switch 9052 which can be operated by an attendant of a game hall or the like. In this case, the display monitor 9029 and the display changeover switch 9030 arranged on the main board 9011 may be housed in the board case. The setting key 9051, the setting changeover switch 9052, and the display changeover switch 9030 may be exposed through an opening formed on the back surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case. The sound output board 9018 is a board for sound output provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, which are sound output devices, according to the sound signal from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits are installed. The driver board 9019 is a drive control board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on the information signal from the effect control board 9012, outputs a drive signal of the effect motor 9060 and a lighting signal of the effect LED 9061. A driver IC to be supplied is mounted.

A security cover may be attached to cover the board case housing the setting key 9051 and the setting switch 9052 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. In the state where the gaming machine frame 903 is closed, the board case containing the setting keys 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 is covered with a security cover from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Accordingly, the setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 become inoperable when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. In the state where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the security cover may be separated from the substrate case, so that the operation of the setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 may be permitted. The setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. Further, by covering the board case including the setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 with the security cover, it is possible to prevent a problem that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is operated from the inside of the gaming island or the like.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The production control command may include a display control command. The display control command is used to control the image display operation in the image display device 905. The production control command may include a voice control command. The voice control command is used to control the voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The production control command may include a lighting control command. The lighting control command is used to control the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 909 and the effect LED 9061. The movable control command is used to control the operation of the movable effect member by the driving force of the effect motor 9060. Each of these commands may separately configure an effect control command, or a combination of some or all of them may configure an effect control command.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a program for game control to perform a control operation, and numerical data that indicates a random number value is updated independently of the CPU 90103. A random number circuit 90104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 90105 are provided. Note that the random number circuit 90104 is not limited to being built in the game control microcomputer 90100, and may be external to the game control microcomputer 90100.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the fixed data reading operation, the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 90103 stores various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. Variable data read operation to read out, CPU 90103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I/O 90105, CPU 90103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I/O 90105 The transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The random number circuit 90104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data that forms a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 90101, table data forming a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns are configured. Table data etc. to be stored are stored.

FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the production control board 9012. Of the electronic components such as the rendering control microcomputer 90120, the external ROM 90121, and the external RAM 90122 mounted on the rendering control board 9012, some or all of the components can be attached/detached by inserting/removing connector pins into/from the connector socket. The other components may be mounted so as to be mountable by soldering or the like. On the production control board 9012, connectors 90150 to 90156 are mounted together with these electronic components. The production control microcomputer 90120 includes a CPU 90131, an internal ROM 90132, an internal RAM 90133, a watchdog timer 90134, a timer circuit 90135, an interrupt controller 90136, a serial communication circuit 90137, a clock circuit 90138, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 90140, and a sound processing circuit. 90141, the lamp control circuit 90142, the motor control circuit 90143, etc. are comprised including several electronic components. The effect control microcomputer 90120 may be any effect control microprocessor that integrates these electronic components. CPU90131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. The internal ROM 90132 fixedly stores a basic program of control processing executed by the CPU 90131 such as firmware, system setting data unique to the effect control microcomputer 90120, and the like. The internal RAM 90133 provides a work area for the CPU 90131. The watchdog timer 90134 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of a built-in register. When the measurement time exceeds the monitoring time (timeout time) and a time-out occurs, a time-out signal becomes a time-out signal. Generate a signal. The CPU 90131 periodically clears and restarts the watchdog timer 90134. When the processing of the CPU 90131 is delayed due to some failure or the like and the watchdog timer 90134 cannot be cleared and the measurement time exceeds the monitoring time, a timeout signal is generated and the processing by the CPU 90131 is reset.

The timer circuit 90135 is, for example, a circuit in which an 8-bit programmable counter is built in for 4 channels (CH0 to CH3) and is a circuit capable of generating a real-time interrupt and measuring time. The timer circuit 90135 starts counting down at a predetermined cycle from a count initial value preset for each channel, and when there is a channel whose count value is "00", sets an interrupt flag corresponding to that channel to the ON state. To do. At this time, if the interrupt is permitted, the timer circuit 90135 causes the interrupt controller 90136 to generate an interrupt request to the CPU 90131. The timer circuit 90135 may have a function as an RTC (Real Time Clock). The RTC can measure the current date and time and output date and time information including date information and time information.

The interrupt controller 90136 is a circuit capable of controlling various interrupt requests and the like generated in the effect control microcomputer 90120. The interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller 90136 includes a plurality of types of interrupts such as an X class interrupt (XIRQ), an I class interrupt (IRQ), a software interrupt (SWI), and an illegal opcode trap (ILGOP). You may stay. The interrupt controller 90136 includes an interrupt control register for setting permission/prohibition of interrupt and priority of interrupt for each type of interrupt. For example, the interrupt controller 90136 may be provided with interrupt control registers corresponding to various interrupts such as serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting. The V sync interrupt is an interrupt that matches the timing at which the vertical synchronizing signal is output from the VDP 90140 that draws an effect image or the like on the image display device 905. The interrupt control register corresponding to each interrupt has internal information data indicating whether the corresponding interrupt is permitted or not (interrupt permission/prohibition data) and internal information data indicating the priority of the corresponding interrupt (interrupt priority level). Data) and can be set. As for the permission/prohibition of interruption, for example, if the value of the interruption permission/prohibition data is “0”, the corresponding interruption is set to the permitted state, and if the value of the interruption permission/prohibition data is “1”, the corresponding interruption is prohibited. Set to state. The priority of the interrupt is set by a numerical value of 16 levels (4 bits) according to the interrupt priority data, and the priority of the interrupt corresponding to “0000 (=0H)” becomes the highest and “1111” is set. (=FH)", the priority of the interrupt corresponding to the case becomes the lowest. The interrupt control register is not limited to the serial reception interrupt setting, the timer interrupt setting, and the V sync interrupt setting. For example, an external interrupt, a serial transmission interrupt, an interrupt by a random number fetch of a random number circuit, etc. An interrupt control register may be provided in correspondence with an arbitrary interrupt related to control of production.

The internal information data set in the interrupt control register is previously set in a predetermined area (program management area or the like) of the internal ROM 90132. When powering on the pachinko gaming machine 901, the CPU 90131 sets the serial communication circuit 90137, sets random number generation, sets internal reset operation, etc. according to the setting contents of the program management area and the like. At this time, internal information data of the interrupt control register corresponding to various interrupts such as serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting for the interrupt controller 90136 is set. As a result, settings such as serial reception interrupt, timer interrupt, and V sync interrupt are made. For example, in the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting, all the interrupt permission/prohibition data of the internal information data show a value of "0", Reception interrupt, timer interrupt, and V sync interrupt are all set to the enabled state. Further, regarding the interrupt priority data of the internal information data, the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the timer interrupt, and the timer interrupt has a higher priority than the V sink interrupt. Are set to the corresponding 4-bit values. A reset controller may be provided inside or outside the interrupt controller 90136. The reset controller controls various resets generated in the production control microcomputer 90120. Resets controlled by the reset controller include system resets and user resets. The system reset occurs when a low level signal is input to the SRST terminal for a certain period. For user reset, if a low level signal is input to the URST terminal for a certain period, a time-out signal of the watchdog timer 90134 is generated, an out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) signal is generated, an interval reset signal is output. When it occurs, it is caused by a predetermined user reset factor.

The serial communication circuit 90137 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from various boards and circuits other than the production control board 9012 by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 90137 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data compatible with a plurality of types of serial communication standards such as UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter), SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). The serial communication circuit 90137 may include a plurality of communication processing units including a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a communication control unit, a serial communication data register, a serial status register, a serial control register, and the like. UART is an asynchronous serial communication standard, and transfers communication data using start bits and stop bits. In this case, the clock signal line is unnecessary, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively low. SPI and I2C are clock synchronous serial communication standards, and transfer communication data using a clock signal. In this case, a clock signal line is required, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively high. In the case of SPI, signal lines corresponding to the clock signal, the transmission data signal, the reception data signal, and the slave selection signal are provided. In the case of I2C, signal lines corresponding to the clock signal and the data signal are provided. The plurality of communication processing units included in the serial communication circuit 90137 may have different hardware configurations according to the plurality of types of serial communication standards. The clock circuit 90138 is a circuit that generates a clock signal to be supplied to each circuit of the effect control microcomputer 90120, such as the CPU 90131 or VDP 90140. For example, the clock circuit divides the external clock input to the clock input terminal to generate an internal system clock signal, and supplies the internal system clock signal to each circuit of the effect control microcomputer 90120.

The VDP 90140 determines the control content of image display in the image display device 905 based on a display control command from the CPU 90131, register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP 90140 performs control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays by deciding the switching timing of effect images displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. The VDP 90140 is an image processor having an image data processing function such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP 90140 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing more commonly called DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The audio processing circuit 90141 can generate an audio signal used for audio output by the speakers 908L and 908R based on an instruction or register setting from the CPU 90131 or VDP 90140. The lamp control circuit 90142 can generate an illumination signal according to a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, turning off or blinking of a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 909 or the effect LED 9061. The motor control circuit 90143 can generate a drive control signal used for driving the effect motor 9060.

The external ROM 90121, as specific contents of the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 90120, various types of data such as instruction codes, management data, table data, effect control patterns, etc., which form a system program or a user program executed by the CPU 90131. Is fixedly stored. The external RAM 90122 temporarily stores various data as an auxiliary area of the internal RAM 90133. The connectors 90150 to 90156 are configured by using, for example, receptacles, and have a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting various signal wirings. The connectors 90150 to 90156 enable various signals to be output via different paths such as different wiring patterns on the production control board 9012. The connector 90150 is a main board wiring connector port to which main board wiring electrically connected to the main board 9011 can be connected. The connector 90151 is a power supply wiring connector port to which power supply wiring electrically connected to a power supply unit such as a power supply board can be connected. The connector 90152 is a connector port for production relay wiring to which production relay wiring electrically connected to a production relay portion such as a production control relay board 9017 can be connected. The connector 90153 is a frame lamp wiring connector port to which frame lamp wiring electrically connected between the lamp output board 9013 and the frame lamp portion provided with a part or all of the game effect lamp 909 can be connected. is there. The connector 90154 is a connector port for backup wiring to which a backup wiring electrically connected to a backup unit such as the backup memory board 9014 can be connected. The connector 90155 is a connector port for effect data wiring capable of connecting effect data wiring electrically connected to an effect data section such as the effect data memory board 9016. The connector 90156 is a connector port for inspection wiring to which an inspection wiring electrically connected to an information processing device for inspection, test, or development (personal computer or the like) can be connected. The information processing device for inspection may be any device that functions as an inspection device for the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, by executing a specific software program. Thus, the connector 90156 becomes an electronic component used as a connecting member to which the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is connected.

The connector 90156 enables connection of inspection wiring, for example, at a trial production stage, a development stage, or a production stage of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the production control microcomputer 90120 ships in response to a test command different from the production control command. The previous inspection process may be made executable. The inspection process before shipment includes, for example, internal parameters and input/output signals when the production control microcomputer 90120 executes a part or all of the program code before the completion of the software program during trial manufacture or development. It may include verifiable processing. The verification environment in which the inspection process is executed before shipment may be, for example, an execution environment corresponding to a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 is installed on the gaming machine installation island, or the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a personal computer alone. It may be an execution environment in which the operating status can be confirmed by connecting to an information processing device such as. Further, the connector 90156 can be connected with inspection wiring at the recovery stage of the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, so that the backup data can be read out in response to a test command different from the production control command. Good. Alternatively, the connector 90156 may be detached at the stage of shipping the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. Alternatively, the connector 90156 is mounted only on a predetermined model such as a demo or a test other than the model in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 is installed in the game hall, and is a model (mass production machine) that is mass-produced and installed in the game hall. It may not be mounted. A land on which the connector 90156 can be mounted may be formed on the surface of the effect control board 9012. When the connector 90156 is removed or not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land where the connector 90156 is not mounted may be soldered. The soldering process is a process of applying solder to the exposed portion of the copper foil pattern, and may be performed using, for example, a cream solder printing machine, or may be performed by any method that does not use the cream solder printing machine. .. When the connector 90156 is mounted and when it is not mounted, the soldering process in the same process may be performed, or the soldering process in the different process may be performed. When the soldering process in the same process is performed, it is not necessary to form a plurality of patterns of metal masks used in a cream solder printing machine for applying solder to the lands, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in cost required for producing the substrate. By soldering unmounted lands on which electronic components such as the connector 90156 are not mounted, oxidation of the copper foil pattern is prevented, defects such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern are prevented, and board quality is appropriately maintained. be able to.

It should be noted that when the electronic component such as the connector 90156 is not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the electronic component is not mounted is not limited to the one that is subjected to the soldering treatment and covered, and for example, a resist that is an insulating coating is applied. It may be coated. In this way, by covering the land on which electronic components are not mounted by any method, it is possible to prevent oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and maintain the board quality appropriately. I wish I could. On the other hand, the land on which the electronic component is not mounted may not be covered by soldering or the like. For example, when the land is soldered, the solder as a conductor may adhere to the copper foil pattern, which may cause an unintended short circuit or current path in the wiring pattern. Therefore, the land on which the electronic components are not mounted is not soldered to prevent the solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuit of the wiring pattern and changes in the current path, and ensure proper board quality. Can be maintained. By performing the insulation film treatment instead of the solder treatment, it is possible to prevent the adhesion of the solder to the copper foil pattern, prevent the defects such as the short circuit of the wiring pattern and the change of the current path, and appropriately maintain the quality of the board. You may do it.

FIG. 12A illustrates a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the backup memory substrate 9014. The backup memory board 9014 is provided with a memory controller 90200, an RTC 90201, a serial communication circuit 90202, an inspection connection section 90203, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, and a connector 90220. As described above, the backup memory substrate 9014 is provided with the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D as a plurality of backup data storage units. The memory controller 90200 can execute backup data write processing and backup processing according to the backup control signal from the effect control board 9012. The RTC 90201 can measure the current date and time, and can supply date and time information including date information and time information to the memory controller 90200. The serial communication circuit 90202 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from the effect control board 9012 by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 90202 only needs to be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data such as SPI, which corresponds to a specific serial communication standard. The serial communication circuit 90202 should just be equipped with the communication processing part of the hardware constitution corresponding to such a specific serial communication standard. The inspection connecting portion 90203 may be formed as a specific conductor portion including a terminal capable of inputting and outputting an inspection signal, such as a test point. When the inspection connecting portion 90203 is a test point, a test probe is brought into contact with the inspection connecting portion 90203 to input/output an inspection signal between the inspection device and the production control microcomputer 90120 of the production control board 9012. Alternatively, it is only necessary that the backup data can be read. The inspection connection unit 90203 inputs an inspection signal between the inspection device and the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory board 9014 or the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D without passing through the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012. It may be possible to output or read backup data. In this way, the inspection connection unit 90203 can provide an interface for performing data communication with the inspection device, which is an external device, on the backup memory board 9014.

The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be partially or entirely configured by using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), and a part or all of the battery-equipped SRAM (Static RAM). May be used. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be partially or entirely configured by using a flash memory such as a NAND-ROM, an EEPROM, or an HDD (Hard Disk Drive). A nonvolatile ferroelectric memory called FRAM (registered trademark) has a memory cell using a ferroelectric film as a capacitor insulating film, and a memory written in the memory cell even when the operating power supply is turned off. No data is lost. The configuration using FRAM (registered trademark) does not require a battery backup for holding data, and has high-speed writing, high rewriting frequency, and low power consumption as compared with a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory, an EEPROM, or an HDD. As a result, it is possible to prevent the installation area from increasing, simplify the device configuration, improve the operation efficiency, and appropriately store and save the backup data. Further, it is not necessary to dispose of the battery, it is possible to prevent the stored contents from being lost due to the replacement of the battery, and it is possible to appropriately store and save the backup data. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board. As described above, the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be capable of holding the stored contents without using a backup power source, for example, when a part or all of them are configured by using FRAM (registered trademark). Alternatively, the backup data memories 90210A and 90210B may be capable of holding the stored contents by using a backup power supply, for example, when a part or all of the backup data memories 90210A and 90210B are configured by using an SRAM with a battery.

The backup memory board 9014 uses the date and time information output by the RTC 90201 to store and store various log information in log areas provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D. The memory controller 90200 can execute the writing process and the reading process of the stored data with respect to the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D according to the command or instruction sent from the production control microcomputer 90120 of the production control board 9012. In this case, by executing a writing process and a reading process of stored data indicating log information including date and time information, an operation history, a setting history, and a history of a plurality of electronic components used for a game or effect in the pachinko gaming machine 901. It suffices if the error history can be stored so that it can be verified afterwards.

FIG. 12B shows a configuration example for connecting the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014. The production control board 9012 includes a connector 90154 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014. The backup memory board 9014 includes a connector 90220 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012. By coupling the connector 90154 and the connector 90220, the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 can be physically and electrically connected. The connector 90154 provided on the production control board 9012 includes terminals TM01 to TM06. The connector 90220 provided on the backup memory substrate 9014 includes terminals TM11 to TM16. The terminals TM01 to TM06 included in the connector 90154 and the terminals TM11 to TM16 included in the connector 90220 have corresponding terminals (for example, terminals TM01 and TM11) physically and electrically when the connectors 90154 and 90220 are coupled. It is sufficient if it is connected to.

The terminal TM01 included in the connector 90154 of the production control board 9012 can provide a specific voltage such as VD1. The terminal TM02 included in the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012 can receive the VD1 of the specific voltage used for confirming the connection with the backup memory board 9014. For example, the specific voltage VD1 output from the terminal TM01 included in the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012 is supplied to the terminal TM11 included in the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014. The terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 90220 may be short-circuited on the backup memory substrate 9014. Therefore, when the connector 90154 and the connector 90220 are coupled, the voltage corresponding to VD1 is supplied from the terminal TM12 of the connector 90220 on the backup board 14 to the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 on the effect control board 9012. R. On the other hand, in the unconnected state where the connector 90154 and the connector 90220 are not coupled, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 in the effect control board 9012.

In the effect control board 9012, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 in order to confirm the connection state with the backup memory board 9014. In this case, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a high voltage value corresponding to VD1, it can be determined that the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 are connected (connected state). On the other hand, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a low voltage value corresponding to the non-supply of voltage, it can be determined that the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 are not connected (unconnected state). In this way, the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM02 which is the connection confirmation member. The connection state is not limited to the one that confirms the connection state based on the terminal voltage, and the connection state may be confirmed based on the input state of the specific signal, for example. Alternatively, the connection state may be confirmed by using a switch or a sensor as a connection confirmation member.

The terminals TM03 to TM06 included in the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012 are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 90137 included in the effect control microcomputer 90120. The terminals TM13 and TM14 included in the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014 are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 90202. Therefore, the wirings connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 90154 and the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 90220 are connected to the CPU 90131 of the production control microcomputer 90120 and the backup memory board via the serial communication circuit 90137 and the serial communication circuit 90202. An electrical connection is provided between the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of 9014 so that the stored data can be transferred. The terminals TM15 and TM16 included in the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014 are connected to the inspection connecting portion 90203 by wiring. Thereby, the wirings connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 90154 and the terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 90220 are for inspection of the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the backup memory substrate 9014 via the serial communication circuit 90137. An electrical connection is provided so that a test signal can be transmitted and received and stored data can be transferred to and from the connection portion 90203.

The backup memory board 9014 is configured to be attachable to and detachable from the effect control board 9012. Thus, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that does not use the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, the backup memory substrate 9014 can be removed, which increases flexibility of the device configuration and increases manufacturing cost. Can be prevented. Further, since the backup memory substrate 9014 can be removed and the stored data can be read and analyzed, the work load of inspecting the stored data can be reduced. The RTC included in the timer circuit 90135 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 provided on the effect control board 9012 may provide the current time for timing adjustment for executing an effect in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 901 are interlocked. Yes, relatively high precision is required. On the other hand, the RTC 90201 of the backup memory board 9014 needs only to be able to specify the context of the storage processing executed on the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, so that the RTC 90201 can be of relatively low precision and sufficiently satisfy the application. You can As described above, since the RTC 90201 of the backup memory substrate 9014 may be of relatively low precision, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost. The configuration and function of the backup memory board 9014 may be configured to be included in the effect control board 9012. For example, the configurations and functions of the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be realized by the external RAM 90122. Even in this case, for example, the wiring pattern in the effect control board 9012, or the switch or the sensor may be used as the connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game is played using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined value is determined based on a player performing a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) on a hit ball operation handle provided in a lower right position of a game machine frame 903 in a pachinko game machine 901. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the hit ball launching device. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes (enters) various winning openings, the game ball as a prize ball is paid out. For example, based on that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 9041, it becomes possible to execute the universal figure game by the normal symbol display 9020. In the ordinary figure game, the ordinary symbols are variably displayed, and when a particular ordinary symbol that is a regular figure per symbol is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". The variable display of the ordinary symbols is performed, and when the ordinary symbols other than the regular symbols which are the regular symbols lost symbols are stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbols becomes "the regular symbols lost". In the case of "universal figure hit", the opening control is performed to open the normally variable winning ball device 906B for a predetermined period, and the second start winning port is opened. When the game ball passes through the first starting prize hole formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the first starting prize is generated. When the game ball passes through the second start winning hole formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the second starting prize is generated. The variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols can be executed based on the occurrence of the first start prize and the second start prize. The special symbol includes a big hit symbol and a deviating symbol, and when the big hit symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display result is "big hit", and when the deviant symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display result. Is the "miss". When the variable display result of the special design or the decorative design is “big hit”, the special winning opening is opened and the game ball is easily passed (entered), which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a big hit game state.

The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability variation state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the big hit game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is greater than the second round number (for example, "7"), and can be executed in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (eg, “100”) larger than the second number (eg, “50”), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (eg, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chans, which is the number of times it is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is larger than the second consecutive chan number (for example, "5"). It may include that a game situation is more advantageous for the player, such as a part or all of the case where one consecutive chan number (for example, “10”) is reached.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described. On the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes game control main processing.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing executed by the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011. In the game control main processing, interrupt prohibition is set (step S901). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 90102 accessible, and the like.

After the initial setting, it is determined whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear switch is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board, and when the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, a clear signal in the on state is input to the game control microcomputer 90100 via the input port. If such a clear signal has not been input, it may be determined in step S903 that the clear switch is off. The backup data can be stored in the RAM 90102 which is a backup RAM for game control. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 90103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 901 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 90102, a data protection process of the RAM 90102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, a backup flag state, and an error detection code. In step S903, it is determined whether the backup flag is on, and if it is on, it is determined that there is backup data. The backup data stored in this way is determined, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum, to determine whether or not the power supply is stopped and restarted. If they match, the backup RAM may be determined to be normal in step S903.

When the restoration condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), the restoration processing (step S904) and the setting confirmation processing (step S905) are executed. In the recovery processing in step S904, the work area is set based on the storage content of the RAM 90102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state when the power supply is stopped is restored, and when the special symbol is being changed, it is sufficient that the change of the special symbol can be restarted from the state before the restoration. If the restoration condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), the initialization process (step S906) and the setting change process (step S907) are executed. In the initialization process of step S906, a RAM clear process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 90102 is performed, and an initial value is set in the work area.

In the setting confirmation processing in step S905, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. For example, the setting confirmation condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is ON and the setting key 9051 is ON at the start of power supply when the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed. Applies when both are met. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is off or when the setting key 9051 is off, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied, and the setting confirmation processing ends. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is ON and the setting key 9051 is ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear switch being off is satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation condition can include that the clear switch is off. In the setting confirmation processing of step S905, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the setting confirmation state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is performed from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. A confirmation start command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stopped state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the game ball is released by operating the hit ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches is stopped, and the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, ordinary symbols The display 9020 may be controlled so as to stop the display of the off symbol and the like, and to display a game stop state different from the off symbol. In the setting confirmation state, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 9029. When ending the setting confirmation state, the game stop state accompanying it ends, and the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. For example, the setting change condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is ON and the setting key 9051 is ON at the start of power supply when the setting change process of step S907 is executed. Applies when both are met. The setting change condition may include that the clear switch is on. In the setting change process of step S907, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is off, the setting key 9051 is off, or the clear switch is off, the setting change condition is satisfied. It is determined that there is not, and the setting change process ends. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is ON, the setting key 9051 is ON, and when the clear switch is ON, it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied. .. When the setting change condition is satisfied, the setting change state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed is set, and the setting change start command is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. .. When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be in the game stopped state as in the setting confirmation state. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 9052 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 9029 is sequentially updated and displayed. For example, each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 9052 is detected, the set value is updated as “1”→“2”→“3”→“1”→... Then, based on the fact that the setting key 9051 is turned off by an operation by a staff member in the game hall, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 9029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 90102, and the display monitor 9029 is also displayed. To turn off. As a result, a person in charge of the game hall is notified that the new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102. When ending the setting change state, the game stop state accompanying it ends, and the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

On the production control board 9012 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 905, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R, or a light emitting member such as the effect LED 9061 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner. When the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, the operation of pressing the operation button for production such as the push button 9031B is detected, and "maintenance mode" is displayed to shift to the maintenance mode. You may comprise. The “maintenance mode” is, for example, date and time setting in the RTC of the timer circuit 90135, history of various errors (record of when and what kind of error occurred), setting change history (when set value is changed, This is a mode in which you can check the record of the changed setting values. When the setting key 9051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode may be completed.

Thus, when the setting key 9051 is turned on when the power is turned on (in addition, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is turned on), if the clear switch is turned on, the initialization process of step S906 and step S907 are performed. When the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed together with the restoration process of step S904, and it is possible to control the setting confirmation state. On the other hand, when the setting key 9051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed while the setting change state is not controlled and the clear switch is turned on. If it is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process of step S905 or the setting change process of step S907, a random number circuit setting process is executed (step S908). The random number circuit setting process is a process in which the numerical data indicating the game random number can be updated by initializing the random number circuit 90104. The random number circuit 90104 may be capable of autonomously updating the numerical data indicating the game random number without executing the random number circuit setting processing by the CPU 90103. Subsequently, an interrupt initial setting process is executed (step S909). The interrupt initial setting process is a process in which permission/prohibition of interrupt and priority can be set according to an interrupt factor generated in the game control microcomputer 90100. For example, the CPU 90103 may read the interrupt initial setting information stored in a predetermined area (such as the program management area) of the ROM 90101, and set the permission/prohibition of interrupt and the priority according to the read value for each interrupt factor. .. The interrupt initial setting process includes a process of generating a regular timer interrupt every predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.) by setting the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100. You may stay. After that, the interrupt permission is set (step S9010), and then the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepting the interrupt request, the CPU 90103 executes the game control timer interrupt process.

The game control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 90103 may include a switch process, a main error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process. .. The switch process is a process in which the CPU 90103 determines the presence or absence of a detection signal received from various switches via the switch circuit 90110. The main-side error process is a process of diagnosing an abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and enabling a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output processing is, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of times of big hits, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, start information (information indicating the number of start winnings, etc.), This is a process that enables output of data such as probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed). The game random number update process is a process that allows at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side to be updated by software. The special symbol process process is a process that enables management of execution and suspension of a special figure game, control of a big hit game state and a small hit game state, control of a game state, and the like. Ordinary symbol process processing is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 9021 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 9041) management of the execution and suspension of the universal game, variable winning ball based on "per universal map" This is a process that enables the opening control of the device 6B. The command control process is a process that enables the production control command set for transmission to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the production control board 9012.

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, first, the start winning determination process is executed. After the start winning determination process is executed, any one of the plurality of processes is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102. Processes that can be selected according to the value of the special figure process flag are special symbol normal processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, special symbol fluctuation processing, special symbol stop processing, big hit opening pre-processing, big hit opening processing, big hit opening post processing, It suffices to include some or all of the processing according to the game control program, such as the big hit ending processing, the small hit opening preprocessing, the small hit opening processing, and the small hit ending processing.

In the start prize determination process, it is determined whether or not the first start prize or the second start prize has occurred, and if so, the setting for updating the number of reserved memories is performed. The reserved storage number indicates the number of times variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols that have not been started yet is performed. In the special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the execution of the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit". Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, the setting of the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game is performed in correspondence with the variable display result. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the variable display result and the like. In the special symbol variation processing, settings for varying the special symbol, settings for measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation, and the like are performed. In the special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is stopped and displayed (derived).

In the big hit opening pre-processing, the variable display result corresponds to "big hit", and settings for opening the special winning opening in the big hit game state are performed. In the big hit opening process, it is determined whether or not to return the big winning opening that has been opened in the big hit game state to the closed state. In the jackpot opening post-processing, after returning the special winning opening to the closed state, it is determined whether the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit value.If not, the next round can be executed, and if it has been reached, Settings for ending the jackpot gaming state are made. In the big hit ending process, after waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect for notifying the end of the big hit game state has elapsed, settings for starting the probability variation control and the time saving control are performed. In the small hit opening pre-process, the variable display result corresponds to "small hit", and settings for opening the special winning opening in the small hit game state are performed. In the process of opening the small hit, it is determined whether or not to return the big winning opening that has been opened in the small hit game state to the closed state. In the small hit end process, after waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before becoming the small hit gaming state Settings are made to continue.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. In the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit can be changed. The set value consists of three levels from "1" to "3", "1" has the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value in the order of "1", "2", "3", the higher the payout rate. .. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2" and "3", the advantage increases in stages. The winning probability of the small hit may be the same regardless of the set value.

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 90101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol (the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is subject to variable display. When, and the variable special map designation buffer value is "2" (second), that is, the second special symbol (special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is the target of variable display For each of these cases, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set. FIG. 14A shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value “1”, FIG. 14B shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value “2”, and FIG. The display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "3" is shown.

When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "1", if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display If the set value is “2” or “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). When the set value is "1" and the variable special map designation buffer value is "1" (first), some of the judgment values are set as the judgment values corresponding to the small hit, and the set values are When it is "1", the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". When the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is "2" (second), the same judgment value as when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is "1" (first) is used as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit. It is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 during non-probability change, probability change time) 1/32) wins the big hit. When the setting value is “1” and the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is “2” (second), half of the determination values are set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, Similar to the case where the value is "2" or "3", the small hit is won with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value “2”, the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” (first), which is higher than the setting value “1”. You win the jackpot with a probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when uncertain change). When the setting value is "2" and the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second) as the determination value corresponding to the big hit. The same judgment value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. (1/300 when uncertain changes, 1/30 when uncertain changes) wins the big hit. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value “3”, the setting values are “1” and “2” when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” (first). The jackpot is won with a higher probability than in the case (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change). When the setting value is "3" and the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second) as the determination value corresponding to the big hit. The same judgment value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. (1/280 when uncertain changes, 1/28 when uncertain changes) wins the big hit.

The CPU 90103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. As a result, a big win or a small win is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” here indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to the big hit is to determine whether to control the big hit gaming state, in the big hit symbol the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B It's also about deciding whether or not to do it. Determining whether to make a small hit, is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, small stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B It is also to decide whether or not to make a winning design. The winning probability of the small hit may be different depending on the set value. For example, similar to the winning probability of the big hit, the winning probability of the small hit may increase as the set value increases in the order of “1”, “2”, and “3”. The setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. If the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “1” is set to 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “2” is designed to be 1/93.75, and the setting value “3” is set. It may be set so that the winning probability of the small hit in 1/8 is 1/87.5. When a small hit is not provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a display result determination table excluding the hit determination value corresponding to the small hit may be used. The big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is a case where it is a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol irrespective of the variation special figure designation buffer value. In this case, a small table is determined for each of the cases where the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is "1" (first) and "2" (second). You may make it perform using. You may comprise so that the ranking of an advantage may change according to a game state. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a high probability/high base state, maintain the high probability/high base state until the next big hit occurs, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and it may be a period in which a prize ball can be easily obtained. Therefore, a specific game state (in this example, In high probability/high base state), unlike other gaming states, big hits are unlikely to occur (high probability/high base state is easy to continue). Set value “1” is the most advantageous setting. May be. When applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends after being controlled to the probability variation state (high-probability state) and a predetermined number of times (probability variation end number) is displayed, the same probability variation end number For example, the probability change continuation rate (rate of continuous vacation) may be configured to increase in the order of set value “1”<set value “2”<set value “3”. The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be two or four or more.

When the variable display result of the special design or the decorative design is “big hit”, the big hit type may be set. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening and gaming states (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) after the big hit gaming state are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these. May be done. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls, a big hit type with few prize balls, or a big hit type that hardly obtains prize balls may be provided. In order to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of big hit types A to big hit type C based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” You may provide the jackpot classification determination table referred. In the jackpot type determination table, the determination value may be assigned such that the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on which of the setting values is “1” to “3”. For example, when the set value is "1", the percentage determined as the big hit type C is high, and when the set value is "2", the percentage determined as the big hit type B is high and the set value is "3". In the case of, the determination value may be assigned such that the proportion determined in the big hit type A is high.

The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the big hit game may be set for each big hit type. The fanfare period, for example, on the main board 9011 side, is a period when the big hit opening pretreatment of the special symbol process processing is executed, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 9012 side, the big hit game state is started. It is a period in which the fanfare production as the production operation to be notified is executed. In the interval period, for example, on the main board 9011 side, a jackpot opening post-processing of special symbol process processing is executed, and on the effect control board 9012 side, after the round in which the special winning opening is opened is completed, Is a period during which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round. The ending period, for example, the main board 9011 side, is a period in which the big hit end processing of the special symbol process processing is executed, on the effect control board 9012 side, the ending effect as a performance operation to notify the end of the big hit game state is executed It is a period of time. As an example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be set to be longest in the big hit type A, longest in the big hit type B, and shortest in the big hit type C. .. If the ratio of determination as the big hit type C is high when the setting value is "1", the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. When the set value is “3”, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long if the percentage of the jackpot type A determined is high. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be made longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

It is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value “1”<“2”<“3”, and at the same time, the set value is “1”<“2”<“3”. In this order, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be increased. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed and Can be prevented from becoming too high. During the big hit game, a big hit medium suggestion effect that suggests a set value may be configured to be executable. The suggestion during big hit can be executed during the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. This can enhance the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. Also, by directing the interest of the player to the suggestive effect during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable. In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is not easily noticed by the players is commonly executed. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set regardless of the set value. Any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the determination values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set is selected in the order of the big hit type A<B<C is used. This makes it possible to increase the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

The number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type, and in the case of a specific big hit type, the high accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state are the big hit game. After the end of the state, it may be continuously executed until the big hit occurs again. In the case of such a specific big hit type, the big hit game state is a so-called condominium state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the jackpot rate differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive unit rate) may be different for each set value. For each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, and the number of times of control may be made different so as to have different advantages. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type. Depending on the set value that has been set, there may be one or more jackpot types that cannot be determined among the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Includes determining by percentage. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be different regardless of the type of big hit. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to the set values “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3” is set, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed to determine the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. You may. It suffices if the enjoyment of the game can be improved by changing the determination rate of the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” according to the set value that has been set. The jackpot type may be determined using the random number value MR1 for display result determination. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The execution rate of normal reach or super reach may differ depending on the set value, so that the set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach or super reach is executed. Regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period. Using the RTC of the game control microcomputer 90100 or the like, a special period may be set in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 10 am to 11 am). The period until the first big hit occurs may be the special period. In the special period, even if the variation pattern determination table in which the determination value is assigned is set so that the ratio of the normal reach loss is higher than that of the non-special period and the difference in the ratio of the normal reach loss between the set values becomes large. Good. As a result, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the game is motivated to play in the special period. It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestive effects at different ratios according to the set values. For example, in the case of the specific setting value, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestive effect is lower than in a range where the setting value is the specific setting value. There may be provided a setting suggestion effect that can be executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is the specific setting value, and is not executed when the setting value is a value other than the specific setting value. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, a limit is set as a limit that the setting suggestive effect is not executed.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, an arbitrary setting suggestion effect may be executed at different rates. For example, in the case of the special period, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a range other than the special period, a limit is set as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestive effect is lower than that in the range being the special period. There may be provided a setting suggestion effect that can be executed at a predetermined rate during the special period and is not executed during the period other than the special period. In this way, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio in the range of the special period. On the other hand, in a range other than the special period, a limit is set as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether it is a special period or not, and it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestive effects at different ratios depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in a range where the special condition is not satisfied, a limit is set as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than that in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate when the special condition is satisfied, and is not executed when the special condition is not satisfied. In this way, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio within the range where the special condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in a range where the special condition is not satisfied, a limit is set as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history of the production in the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the effect. It may be any condition that can be satisfied in accordance with the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied. The performance mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. .. Further, an arbitrary effect may be provided with a limit as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in a range where a preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with a range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be set as a limit that the execution ratio decreases and the execution is difficult.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. In the effect control board 9012, when power supply from the power supply board is started, the effect control microcomputer 90120 is activated, and the CPU 90131 executes effect control main processing. The program for executing the effect control main process may be stored in advance in one or both of the internal ROM 90132 and the external ROM 90121. As described above, a part or all of the program for executing the effect control main processing may be stored in advance in the internal ROM 90132 or the external ROM 90121.

FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed by the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. In the effect control main process, an initialization process is executed (step S9021). In the initialization processing of step S9021, one or both of the external RAM 90122 and the internal RAM 90133 are cleared to set various initial values, and the register settings of the timer circuit 90135 are initialized. Following the initialization process, an initial operation control process is executed (step S9022). In the initial operation control processing of step S9022, control for performing the initial operation of the production movable member, such as control for driving the production motor 9060 to return the production movable member to the initial position and control for confirming the operation, is executed. .. After the initial operation control processing, power-on information processing is executed (step S9023). In the power-on information processing of step S9023, a storage process of log information including the power-on date and time may be executed. The data indicating the log information is written and stored as backup data in the log area provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014. The CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 transmits a control signal corresponding to the backup command for power-on to the backup memory substrate 9014 via the serial communication circuit 90137. In the backup memory substrate 9014, the memory controller 90200 responds to the backup command indicated by the control signal received via the serial communication circuit 90202, and writes the log information including the power-on date and time by using the date and time information acquired from the RTC 90201. It suffices to execute the processing. In the power-on information processing in step S9023, a backup restoration process may be executed to restore settings and control based on the log information stored in the log area.

After power-on information processing, interrupt initialization processing is executed (step S9024). In the interrupt initialization process of step S9024, it is sufficient that the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller 90136 can be initialized. The priority order of the interrupts controlled by the interrupt controller 90136 may be set based on the interrupt priority data stored in advance in a program management area or the like provided in one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132. For example, the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the effect control timer interrupt, and the effect control timer interrupt has a higher priority than the V sync interrupt so that the priority of the interrupt is higher. Should be set. After setting the interrupt permission (step S9025), the loop processing is started.

FIG. 15B shows a setting example of the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 90120. The processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 90120 may be determined in advance based on the priority of the interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller 90136 and the specifications of the effect control microcomputer 90120. As an example, the CPU exception event occurrence process has the highest priority, then the VDP error interrupt process has the highest priority, and then the process according to the interrupt priority order controlled by the interrupt controller 90136. The processing priority may be set in advance so that the priority becomes. The VDP error interrupt process may be executed based on the occurrence of an interrupt factor that can be controlled by the interrupt controller 90136. In this case, for example, the priority order of the VDP error interrupt may be set by the interrupt initialization process in step S9024 so that the priority level of the VDP error interrupt becomes highest. The CPU exception event occurrence process is a process executed by the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 when an exception event occurs due to an abnormality in the internal state. The exceptional event of the CPU 90131 may occur when an undefined instruction that is not defined in the instruction set is decoded. The exceptional event of the CPU 90131 may occur when an invalid operation such as division by zero or overflow is executed. The exceptional event of the CPU 90131 may occur when a storage protection violation in the virtual memory occurs. The exceptional event of the CPU 90131 may occur in the case of a TLB (Translation Lookaside Buffer) miss in which translation from a virtual address to a physical address becomes abnormal. The VDP error interrupt process is a process executed when an error interrupt request is generated by the VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 due to an abnormality in the internal state or the like. The error interrupt request of the VDP 90140 may be generated in response to an exceptional event of the VDP 90140, as in the case of the CPU 90131. In addition, the VDP 90140 error interrupt request may be issued when the setting of the clock signal (dot clock) used for display control of the image display device 905 is abnormal. The VDP 90140 error interrupt request may be issued when the decoding of the moving image data is abnormal. The VDP 90140 error interrupt request may be issued when the audio data is decoded abnormally. The VDP 90140 error interrupt request may be generated in response to a system reset in the VDP 90140. In this way, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when an exception event of the CPU 90131 occurs. The VDP error interrupt process is executed when an error interrupt request of the VDP 90140 is generated. Therefore, when the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the CPU 90131 is satisfied, the CPU exception event occurrence time process is executed. When the occurrence condition of the event corresponding to the internal state of VDP 90140 is satisfied, the VDP error interrupt process is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing and the VDP error interrupt processing can be executed when the conditions for occurrence of an event that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 90131 or VDP 90140 are satisfied.

FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing an example of CPU exception event occurrence processing. In the CPU exception event occurrence processing, first, exception time preprocessing is executed (step S9041). In the exception preprocessing in step S9041, the control information for executing the instruction code is saved in, for example, a predetermined area (stack area or the like) of the internal RAM 90133. The control information for executing the instruction code may include the stored value of the program counter (PC) and the value of the program status word (PSW). Subsequent to the pre-exception processing, the backup processing at the exceptional time is executed (step S9042). In the exceptional backup process of step S9042, a process of storing log information including exceptional event information is executed. In this case, a control signal corresponding to the backup instruction for the exceptional event occurrence is transmitted to the backup memory board 9014. The backup instruction at the time of occurrence of an exceptional event may include exceptional event information indicating an exceptional event that has occurred in the CPU 90131. The exceptional event information may indicate the type of exceptional event in a distinguishable manner. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory board 9014 receives the backup command for the occurrence of the exceptional event, the date and time information acquired from the RTC 90201 may be used to execute the writing process of the log information including the exceptional event information.

After the exceptional backup processing, other exceptional processing is executed (step S9043). In step S9043, for example, the exception handling routine may be started by accessing the vector table and jumping to the obtained exception handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 90131 may be saved. If the exception event can be resolved by the exception processing routine, or if the exception event cannot be resolved and a reset occurs, the same backup process as in step S9042 is executed to resolve the exception event. The log information when there is no log may be stored. When the exceptional process is completed, the exceptional post-process is executed (step S9044) and the CPU exceptional event occurrence process is terminated. In the post-exception process of step S9044, it is possible to return to the process before the occurrence of the exception event by restoring the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 90131 and restoring the control information for executing the instruction code. Good.

FIG. 16B is a flowchart showing an example of the VDP error interrupt processing. In the VDP error interrupt process, first, an error interrupt preprocess is executed (step S9051). In the error interrupt preprocessing of step S9051, the control information for executing the instruction code is saved in a predetermined area (such as a stack area) of the internal RAM 90133, for example. Following the error interrupt pre-process, an error interrupt backup process is executed (step S9052). In the backup processing at the time of error interrupt in step S9052, the storage processing of the log information including the VDP error information is executed. In this case, the control signal corresponding to the backup command for the VDP error occurrence is transmitted to the backup memory substrate 9014. The backup command at the time of VDP error occurrence may include VDP error information indicating an error that occurred in VDP 90140. The VDP error information may indicate the type of VDP error in a distinguishable manner. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory board 9014 receives the backup command when the VDP error occurs, the memory controller 90200 may execute the writing process of the log information including the VDP error information using the date and time information acquired from the RTC 90201.

Following the error interrupt backup processing, other error interrupt processing is executed (step S9053). In step S9053, for example, depending on the interrupt factor corresponding to the VDP error, the processing may branch to the interrupt processing routine by jumping to the acquired interrupt handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 90131 may be saved. If the VDP 90140 is capable of autonomously performing the recovery process from the internal error, the VDP 90140 may stand by until the notification of the completion of the recovery or the notification of the reset occurrence due to the inability to recover. Upon receiving these notifications, the backup process similar to step S9052 may be executed to store the log information when the VDP 90140 recovers from the error state or cannot recover. When the error interrupt process ends, the error interrupt post process is executed (step S9054), and the VDP error interrupt process ends. In the error interrupt post-processing of step S9054, it is possible to return to the processing before the VDP error occurrence by restoring the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 90131 and restoring the control information for instruction code execution. And it is sufficient.

The CPU exception event occurrence processing includes the exception backup processing in step S9042. The VDP error interrupt process includes the backup process at the time of error interrupt in step S9052. In the exceptional backup process of step S9042, as backup data indicating log information, data including exceptional event information relating to the CPU 90131 among the plurality of electronic components is stored in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014. A writing process for writing in the area is executed. In the backup process at the time of error interrupt in step S9052, as backup data indicating log information, data including VDP error information regarding VDP 90140 among a plurality of electronic components is provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014. A writing process for writing in the log area is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when the occurrence condition of the event corresponding to the internal state of the CPU 90131 is satisfied and when the exception event of the CPU 90131 occurs. The VDP error interrupt processing is executed when an event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the VDP 90140 is satisfied and when an error interrupt request of the VDP 90140 occurs. As described above, when the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 90131 or the VDP 90140 is satisfied, the information regarding the plurality of electronic components is written in the storage area such as the log area. A writing process for storing can be executed.

After the interrupt permission is set in step S9025 of the effect control main process, a timeout occurs in a predetermined channel of the timer circuit 90135 every predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.), so that the interrupt controller 90136 instructs the CPU 90131. Then, an interrupt request signal corresponding to the timer interrupt for effect control is output. Upon receiving the interrupt request signal and accepting the interrupt request, the CPU 90131 starts execution of the effect control timer interrupt process.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 90131. In the effect control timer interrupt processing, command analysis processing is executed (step S9071). In the command analysis processing of step S9071, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect is read. Settings and control corresponding to control commands are performed. Following the command analysis processing, effect control process processing is executed (step S9072). In the effect control process processing, for example, an operation for displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, an operation for outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation for a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 909 and the effect LED 9061, an effect motor 9060. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the production operation using various production devices, various determinations regarding production, depending on the production control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the elapsed time or the detection result depending on the progress situation of the game or production. Decisions, settings, etc. are made.

After the effect control process processing, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S9073). In the production random number updating process in step S9073, at least a part of the production random numbers used on the production control board 9012 side is updated by software. After the production random number update processing, production mode change processing is executed (step S9074). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be controlled in three types of effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C, and depending on which effect mode is controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 905 is Differently, the types of characters appearing in the notice production and the reach production may be different. Control for changing from the current effect mode to a different effect mode may be performed when the effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, based on the date and time information acquired from the RTC included in the timer circuit 90135, when a specific date or time comes, the effect mode change condition may be satisfied and the effect mode may be changed. Alternatively, the effect mode may be changed when the lottery process using the random numbers for effect is executed and the effect mode change condition is satisfied according to the determination result.

Following the effect mode change processing, error notification processing is executed (step S9075). In the error notification processing of step S9075, control for notifying various errors that have occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed. The notification by such control may include left-handed notification and full tank notification. The left-hand hit notification is, for example, a notification that prompts the player to perform a left-hand hit operation based on the total number of times that the game ball has been detected to pass through a passage gate provided in the right area of the game area. The left-handed notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as “Aim for the left!” on the image display device 905, a notification by turning on all the game effect lamps 909, and a notification sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The notification may be included, or a combination of some or all of these may be included. The full tank notification is a notification that prompts the player to cancel the full tank status based on the elapsed time when the surplus ball storage tray (lower tray) is in the full tank state. .. The full tank notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as "the bottom plate is full!" on the image display device 905, a notification by turning on all the game effect lamps 909, and a notification sound from the speakers 908L and 908R. May be included, or a combination of some or all of these may be included. In addition, the error notification processing is performed by displaying, lighting or emitting light, outputting sound, or a combination of some or all of these in accordance with the occurrence of an error designated by the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 9011. It suffices to include control for notifying various errors that have occurred. Alternatively, regardless of the game control error designation command, when it is determined that an error relating to electronic components including the rendering device has occurred, depending on the processing result of the CPU 90131, display, lighting, light emission, sound output, or Control for notifying various errors that have occurred may be performed by a combination of some or all of these.

After the error notification processing, maintenance mode processing is executed (step S9076). In the maintenance mode process of step S9076, control is performed so that the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed. The maintenance history screen is, for example, when the setting confirmation display corresponding to the setting confirmation state or the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed, detection of an operation to be performed by an attendant of the game arcade on the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B. It can be displayed when it is determined that the maintenance history selection operation is performed based on the result. When displaying the maintenance history screen, all log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014. On the image display device 905, a maintenance history screen including the read log information as history information is displayed. The setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed when it is determined that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, which is an operation performed by an attendant in the game arcade. Become. When the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, all setting change and setting confirmation log information is read from the log area provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014. The image display device 905 displays a setting change/confirmation history screen including the read setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information. Note that the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen are different from the staff at the game arcade, and can be displayed based on the detection result of the operation that is performed by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Good. The maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen are screens that the player of the pachinko gaming machine 901 cannot see while playing, and may be screens that can be confirmed by an attendant of the game hall or a person in charge of the manufacturer. Good.

After the maintenance mode process, the current time setting process is executed (step S9077). In the current time setting process of step S9077, control for setting the current date and current time is performed. In this case, the setting information of the current date and the current time can be input based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, which is the operation performed by the attendant at the game arcade. For example, the hour signal indicating the time when the setting is input, the minute signal indicating the minute, the second signal indicating the second, the year signal indicating the year, the month signal indicating the month, the day signal indicating the day, and the day of the week signal indicating the day of the week, The CPU 90131 sequentially receives. It suffices that the setting of the current date and the current time measured by the RTC of the timer circuit 90135 can be changed by updating the stored information of the RTC in the timer circuit 90135 according to these received signals. In addition, by updating the storage information of the RTC 90201 provided in the backup memory board 9014 according to the input setting information, the setting of the current date and the current item measured by the RTC 90201 may be changed. When the current time setting process ends, the date and time information storing process is executed (step S9078). In the date/time information storage processing in step S9078, control is performed to store and store the date/time information in the temporary area of the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every 100 milliseconds). The date and time information stored in the temporary area should be able to be stored as log information indicating the power cut date and time when the RAM clear notification command or the power failure recovery designation command is received from the main board 9011. After performing the effect control backup process (step S9079), the effect control timer interrupt process ends. In the production control backup process of step S9079, when preset backup conditions are satisfied, backup data indicating various log information is stored in the backup data memory 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014 in the log area provided. A storage process of storing and storing is executed. In this case, the log information to be stored may be information that includes a part or all of the operation history, the setting history, the error history, and the like regarding a plurality of electronic components used for games and effects in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Further, the log information may include date and time information indicating the stored date and time.

FIG. 18 shows an example of contents of a production control command transmitted for a game from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 to the production control microcomputer 90120 of the production control board 9012. In the following, the subscript H indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command that can be received by the effect control microcomputer 90120 has a 2-byte structure, the first byte is MODE data indicating the command classification, and the second byte is EXT data indicating the command type. The first bit (bit 7) of the high-order data (MODE data) of the effect control command is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the low-order data (EXT data) of the effect control command is always set to "0". To be done. The effect control command is not limited to the 2-byte structure, and a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used, for example. The production control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 as the game progresses. The effect control microcomputer 90120 receives any of the effect control commands as the game progresses. As described above, the effect control command is a game effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 to the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in accordance with the control related to the progress of the game. Is.

The fluctuation start command 80XXH specifies that fluctuation starts for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is a plurality of special symbols. XXH, which is the lower data (EXT data) of the variation start command, may be 01H at the variation start of the first special symbol and 02H at the variation start of the second special symbol, for example. The variation pattern designation command 81XXH designates the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 905 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. XXH, which is the lower data (EXT data) of the variation pattern designation command, indicates a value corresponding to the variation pattern. The display result designation command 8CXXH designates the display result of variable display. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the display result designation command, indicates a value corresponding to the display result of the variable display. The symbol confirmation command 8F00H specifies to end the fluctuation of the symbol. The RAM clear notification command 9000H notifies that the contents stored in the RAM 90102 have been cleared due to initialization by the game control microcomputer 90100 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by turning on the power. The setting change start command 9100H specifies the start of a setting change state in which the set value can be changed when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by turning on the power. The power failure recovery designation command 9200H specifies execution of power failure recovery processing corresponding to power failure recovery. The setting change end command 93XXH specifies the end of the setting change state. In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. For example, the command 9300H specifies that the setting value is set to "1", the command 9301H specifies that the setting value is set to "2", and the command 9302H sets the setting value to "3". Specifies that it is set. Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H in which the EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be specified by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, a setting value designation command for designating a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be prepared as an effect control command different from the setting change end command. The setting value designation command corresponds to the fluctuation start at each time of the special figure game in addition to the case where the setting change end command is transmitted, for example, when the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are transmitted. And may be transmitted. Further, for example, every time the fluctuation display is started ten times in the special figure game, the set value designation command may be transmitted as the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times. Instead of these or in addition to these, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the customer waiting demo designation command.

The setting confirmation start command 9400H designates the start of a setting confirmation state that enables confirmation of the set value when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by powering on. The setting confirmation end command 9401H specifies the end of the setting confirmation state. The gaming state designation command 95XXH designates the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state, time saving state). And a second game state designation command corresponding to. The game control error designation command 96XXH designates the occurrence of an error (abnormality) relating to the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the type of the generated error (abnormality). In the game control error designation command, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 9012 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) may be notified by an error notification process. The customer waiting demonstration designation command 9F00H designates display of a customer waiting demonstration screen (display of demo screen) such as display of effect image corresponding to stop of progress of game in customer waiting state. The hit start designation command A0XXH designates display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The special winning opening opening designation command A1XXH specifies that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. After the special winning opening opening designation command A2XXH, in the big hit game state or the small hit gaming state, it specifies the period during which the big winning opening changed from the open state to the closed state. The hit end designation command A3XXH designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The background designation command B0XXH designates the display state of the background screen according to the game state or the like. The first reserve storage number designation command C1XXH designates the first reserve storage number. The first reserved storage number is a variable display reserved number corresponding to the first special symbol display device 904A among the reserved storage numbers, and is any value of “0” to “4”, for example. The second reserve storage number designation command C2XXH designates the second reserve storage number. The second hold storage number is a variable display hold number corresponding to the second special symbol display device 904B among the hold storage numbers, and is, for example, any value of “0” to “4”. The prize determination result specification command C3XXH specifies the prize determination result. The winning determination result is a game when the first starting opening switch 9022A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening, or the second starting opening switch 9022B has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening. Whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" by using the numerical data indicating the game random number extracted from the game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90104 or the RAM 90102 when the sphere is detected It shows the result of determination of, the result of determination of the variation pattern, and the like. That is, the winning determination result is a result of determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state or a specific variation pattern before determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state. The result of determining whether or not is shown.

FIG. 19 shows an example of contents of an effect control command which is a test command receivable by the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012. The production control command, which is a test command, also has a 2-byte structure like the production control command for games. The production control command serving as a test command has upper data (MODE data) set to any of F0H to F3H. These upper data (MODE data) are values that are not used in the game effect control command, and may be prepared in advance as a dedicated command for performing various inspections. Note that the test command is not limited to the 2-byte test command, and for example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used. The test command is not included in the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 as the game progresses. The test command is transmitted from the inspection device as an external device connected to the inspection connection part 90203 provided on the connectors 90150, 156 or the backup memory substrate 9014, for example, to the inspection connection part 90203. Based on the reception by the production control microcomputer 90120, the inspection process or the like corresponding to the received command can be executed. In this way, the production control command serving as the test command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 to the production control microcomputer 90120 on the production control board 9012 as the game progresses. Unlike the control command, it is a production control command for inspection that enables execution of inspection processing for performing various inspections.

The black screen display command F000H causes the image display device 905 to display a black screen for testing. The black screen for testing is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is black. The ROM check screen command F005H displays the execution result and version information of the inspection processing of various ROMs such as the external ROM 62AK120 on the screen of the image display device 905. The red display command F020H causes the image display device 905 to display a red screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is red. The green display command F021H causes the image display device 905 to display a green screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is green. The blue display command F022H causes the image display device 905 to display a blue screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is blue. The white display command F023H causes the image display device 905 to display a white screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is white. The black display command F024H causes the image display device 905 to display a black screen which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is black. The RTC value type designation command F1XXH designates the type of RTC value. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the RTC value type designation command, indicates a value corresponding to the type of RTC value, such as year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second. The RTC numerical value setting command F2XXH sets specific contents and numerical values for the type of RTC value specified by the RTC value type specifying command F1XXH. XXH which is the lower data (EXT data) of the RTC numerical value setting command indicates a value corresponding to a specific numerical value for the year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and corresponds to the day of the week from Sunday to Saturday. Indicates the value.

The check processing etc. designation command F3XXH designates execution of various kinds of check processing which are inspection processing. For example, XXH, which is the lower data (EXT data) of the check processing specification command, indicates a unique value that is different between one check processing and another check processing, or a value that is common to multiple types of check processing. There is a case. The check processing etc. designation command F3XXH constitutes a plurality of test commands, and if a combination of a plurality of test commands is received in a predetermined order, various check processing or the like to be an inspection processing can be executed. Good. In addition, a plurality of types of order are predetermined as the order of receiving a plurality of test commands that are predetermined corresponding to various check processes that are inspection processes, and the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received. It suffices to be able to execute different inspection processes and the like depending on the type of.

FIG. 20 shows a setting example of the reception order of test commands by the reception order list and the processing to be executed. As processes that can be executed by combining a plurality of test commands, backup clear, external RAM check (short), external RAM check (long), and backup inspection are prepared in advance. FIG. 20A shows the order of receiving a combination of a plurality of test commands when executing the backup clear process. FIG. 20B shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the external RAM check (short) process is executed. FIG. 20C shows the order of receiving a combination of a plurality of test commands when executing the external RAM check (long) process. FIG. 20D shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the backup inspection process is executed. In the reception order shown in FIGS. 20A to 20D, a combination of a plurality of test commands is received in an order from top to bottom, and when all the reception orders match, the corresponding process is executed.

The backup clear process is a process of initializing the storage content of backup data. The backup data is, for example, storage data of log areas provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014, and indicates various log information. The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes for checking whether or not data can be appropriately written and read in the storage area of the external RAM 90122. The external RAM check (short) process is a process that can be executed in a shorter time than the external RAM check (long) process, and may include any process content that is more simplified than the external RAM check (long) process. .. The backup inspection process is an inspection process executed based on the stored contents of backup data. In this case, the backup data read from the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014 may be output to the inspection device as an external device.

The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes that enable inspection of the state of an electronic component called the external RAM 90122. The backup inspection process is an inspection process that enables confirmation of information about various electronic components based on the stored content of backup data indicating log information. In this way, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute the inspection process that enables or confirms the state of the electronic component by combining a plurality of test commands. The combination of a plurality of test commands according to the reception order is configured by a check processing etc. designation command in which all upper data (MODE data) of the reception command is F3H. In this way, the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the inspection process is configured as a combination of the effect control commands for inspection different from the effect control commands for game received as the game progresses. .. Therefore, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component is not executed based on the reception of the game production control command. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component from being erroneously executed based on the game production control command received as the game progresses, and perform an appropriate inspection. You can Further, for example, since the possibility that the inspection process is erroneously executed during the progress of the game is reduced, the trouble caused by misunderstanding that the game machine is damaged due to the incorrect execution of the inspection process is prevented, It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to the interruption and improve the reliability of the inspection process.

The combination of the plurality of test commands received when executing the backup clear process includes the command that becomes F311H among the check process specification commands. The combination of the plurality of test commands received when the external RAM check (short) process is executed includes the command of F312H among the check process specifying commands. The combination of the plurality of test commands received when executing the external RAM check (long) process includes the command that becomes F313H among the check process specifying commands. The combination of the plurality of test commands received when the backup inspection process is executed includes the command of F314H among the commands for specifying the check process and the like. None of these commands is included in the combination of a plurality of test commands received when executing other processing. In this way, the combination of multiple test commands received to execute a specific inspection process does not include the unique test command that is not included in the combination of multiple test commands received to execute another inspection process. May be included. For example, when the command to be F303H or the command to be F304H out of the designated commands such as the check process is to be executed, any of the backup clear process, external RAM clear (short) process, external RAM clear (long) process, and backup inspection process Even included in the combination of multiple test commands received. As described above, the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the specific inspection process includes the common test command included in the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the other inspection process. You can leave. In addition, for example, the command that becomes F37FH among the check processing specification commands is the last received test command in the combination of the plurality of received test commands, regardless of which processing is executed. In this way, the test command received last in the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the specific inspection process is the last test in the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the other inspection process. It may be the same command as the received test command. Note that the first received test command in a combination of a plurality of test commands is not limited to a unique command, and at least one received in a common order in a combination of a plurality of test commands corresponding to a plurality of types of inspection processing. Partial test commands may be unique commands. Further, the test command received last in a combination of a plurality of test commands is not limited to a common command, and at least one received in a common order in a combination of a plurality of test commands corresponding to a plurality of types of inspection processing. Partial test commands may be common commands. The combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the inspection process may be configured as a combination of a larger number of commands than the game effect control commands received as the game progresses. In this case, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component is not executed by the number of effect control commands received for the game. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component from being erroneously executed based on the game production control command received as the game progresses, and perform an appropriate inspection. You can Further, for example, since the possibility that the inspection process is erroneously executed during the progress of the game is reduced, the trouble caused by misunderstanding that the game machine is damaged due to the incorrect execution of the inspection process is prevented, It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to the interruption and improve the reliability of the inspection process. As a combination of a plurality of test commands, there are a plurality of types in the order of receiving the test commands. Then, as an inspection process such as an external RAM check (short) process, an external RAM check (long) process, and a backup inspection process, different processes can be executed depending on the type of the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received. .. Also, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component differs depending on the combination of a plurality of test commands. As a result, various inspection processes for inspecting the state of the electronic component can be executed and appropriate inspection can be performed.

In the production control backup process executed in step S9079 of the production control timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not a preset backup condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied, the backup process for storing and storing the backup target data according to the satisfied backup condition is executed. As the backup condition, a plurality of different conditions may be set according to the occurrence of events including various changes and settings in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The backup control table indicating a plurality of backup conditions may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (a program management area or the like) provided in one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132, for example. The backup target data may include different data depending on the backup condition. Alternatively, the backup target data may include data common to a plurality of backup conditions. Regardless of which backup condition is satisfied, backup target data indicating log information including date and time information may be stored. As a backup method for storing the data to be backed up, a batch backup and a split backup may be prepared. In the case of a batch backup, the backup target data for one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt for effect control. In the case of divided backup, the backup target data for one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on a plurality of timer interrupts for effect control.

The backup process for storing and storing the data to be backed up according to the backup condition is performed every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, when the backup condition is satisfied in the effect control backup process in step S9079. It may be executable or may be collectively executable when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. When it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied in the production control backup process when the backup process is collectively executed when the power is cut off, for example, a backup indicating log information including date and time information is provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122. The target data is stored.

FIG. 21 shows a setting example of the backup control table 120T that provides a plurality of backup conditions and the like. The backup control table 120T is configured such that a backup condition, a backup method, a division method, a storage area bit number, a multiplicity, and a verification method can be set for each backup target data indicating the contents of the log information. When the backup method is split backup, "automatic" or "every 100 KB" can be designated as the split method. The division method is a method or method for dividing the backup target data when executing the division backup, and it is sufficient that the number of divisions and the data capacity at the time of division can be specified. For example, when the division method is “automatic”, the number of divisions is determined every time the backup process is executed according to the data capacity of the backup target data. Alternatively, the number of divisions and the data capacity at the time of division may be determined depending on the processing load on the effect control board 9012 or the backup memory board 9014. The storage area bit number is a processing unit of storage data in a log area which is a storage area for storing log information in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D provided on the backup memory substrate 9014, and in this example, indicates 8 bits. "8" or "3" indicating 3 bits can be designated. The multiplicity is a degree of mirroring in which backup target data indicating the same log information is distributed and stored while overlapping in different log areas, and whether or not the data is mirrored for storage and storage in the case of mirroring are stored. The number of times can be specified. For example, when the multiplicity is “1”, mirroring is not performed and backup target data indicating the same log information is stored and backed up only once. When the multiplicity is “2”, mirroring is performed twice, and backup target data indicating the same log information is stored twice in different storage areas for backup. When the multiplicity is “3”, mirroring is performed three times, and backup target data indicating the same log information is stored in different storage areas three times for backup. By increasing the multiplicity, it is possible to improve redundancy (availability) and enhance reliability of stored data.

The verification method that can be set for each backup target data is a method that verifies whether the backup process, which is the storage process of the backup target data, was performed correctly, and specifies whether or not to make a judgment by majority with error detection. It is possible. If the verification method is error detection, when the backup target data is read from the log area, any error detection process using parity, checksum, or hash value is executed to verify the correctness of the stored data. I wish I could. If the verification method is majority decision with error detection, error detection processing using parity, checksum or hash value, etc., and multiple log areas in which backup target data indicating the same log information multiplexed by mirroring are stored Compare stored data. As a result of this comparison, if the stored contents match in a predetermined number of log areas among the plurality of log areas, it is only necessary to determine that the backup processing has been performed correctly and to verify the validity of the stored data. For example, when the parities, checksums, or hash values calculated from the storage data in a plurality of log areas match, it can be determined that the backup processing has been correctly performed for each log area. If the parity, checksum, or hash value calculated from the storage data in multiple log areas do not match, and if the number of log areas for which the same parity, checksum, or hash value is calculated is the majority, It may be determined that the log area has been backed up correctly (judgment by majority). The “predetermined number of log areas” that is a condition for determining that backup processing has been performed correctly is not limited to a majority of log areas, and is a preset fixed value (such as “2”) regardless of the multiplicity. It may be a variable value determined according to the multiplicity, the backup method, the division method, or the like. Instead of the majority decision, it may be determined that the backup process is correctly performed when the execution result of the error detection process first becomes normal.

Data to be backed up is system data, production control error data, player history data, received command data, setting value change time data, power saving setting data, current time change data, power cut time data, store name setting data, production output amount. Data and performance history data are included. Note that the backup target data may include some of these. The system data only needs to include effect control data stored in a predetermined area (effect control data holding area or the like) provided in the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133. The effect control error data is data indicating an error that occurs during execution of effect control. The player history data is data regarding the player acquired by the pachinko gaming machine 901. The received command data is data indicating the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. The set value change time data is data indicating the date and time when the set value was changed. The set value change time data may include data indicating the date and time when the set value is confirmed, or the set value check time data may be generated separately from the set value change time data. The power saving setting data is data related to power saving control that can be set by an attendant of the game arcade. The power saving control is set, for example, by operating the knob of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to operate the power saving function setting screen when the image display device 905 displays the power saving function setting screen. It suffices if it is possible to change the presence or absence of the function and the type (power saving mode). Alternatively, when a test command for power saving setting is input, a power saving function setting screen may be displayed on the image display device 905 so that the presence or absence of the power saving function and the function (power saving mode) can be changed. The current time change data is data indicating that the setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC has been changed. The setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC may be one or both of the setting of the RTC included in the timer circuit 90135 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the setting of the RTC 90201 provided in the backup memory board 9014. Good. The power-off time data is data indicating the date and time when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 was stopped. The store name setting data is data indicating the setting of a store name that can be set by a staff member of a game hall or the like. The effect output amount data is data indicating the setting of the output amount such as the volume and the light emission amount that can be set by the player or the like. The effect history data is data indicating a history of effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In addition, the number of rotations that indicates the number of times variable display is performed from a specific timing, the number of big hits that indicates the number of big hits counted for each type of big hit, the number of consecutive chans that indicates the number of big hits that have occurred without being controlled to the normal state, and the player. Optional information according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the progress of control, such as performance customization indicating the character selection contents and performance theme of the performance image set by, the mission achievement status indicating the achievement status of a predetermined mission, etc. It suffices if the data indicating the can be stored as backup target data.

The backup condition that can be set for each piece of data to be backed up may be any occurrence condition of an event that can occur with the progress of a game or production, such as setting, control, determination, and detection in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the production control backup process executed in step S9079 of the production control timer interrupt process, it is set in advance in accordance with the processing result by the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 90131 or the VDP 90140 of the production control microcomputer 90120. It may be determined whether or not any of the backup conditions is satisfied. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S9075, by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or by determining various detection results, When an error related to the included electronic component occurs, control for notifying the error is performed. In this case, in the production control backup process, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is satisfied, and production control error data is created. In this way, when it is determined in the production control backup process that the backup condition is satisfied, the control signal corresponding to the backup command for production control backup is transmitted to the backup memory board 9014. The backup command for backup during production control may include the backup target data. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory substrate 9014 receives the backup command for production control backup, it may execute the writing process of the log information including the backup target data using the date and time information acquired from the RTC 90201. By storing the error information regarding the electronic components including the rendering device, it becomes easy to identify the defect and improve the performance.

The effect control backup process is executed in step S9079 of the effect control timer interrupt process based on the occurrence of the effect control timer interrupt. Then, when the occurrence condition of the event corresponding to the processing result by the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 90131 or the VDP 90140 is satisfied, the backup condition set for each backup target data regarding the plurality of electronic components including the rendering device is satisfied. Backup processing is executed to store the backup target data. As described above, when the event occurrence condition relating to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied, and when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the processing result of the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 90131 or the VDP 90140 is satisfied, the log area or the like is stored. It is possible to execute a writing process for writing and storing information regarding a plurality of electronic components in the area.

The backup condition that can be set for each backup target data may include a write condition that is different from the event occurrence condition corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. For example, for the player history data, the backup condition is satisfied when the data related to the player is updated, regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components has occurred. With respect to the received command data, the backup condition may be satisfied when the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received, even when an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components does not occur. With respect to the store name setting data, the backup condition is satisfied when the name of the store corresponding to the game arcade is set regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. The system data is stored regardless of whether the backup condition is satisfied at the time of updating the data due to the occurrence of an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components or whether the event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components occurs. The backup condition may be met when updating data. In this way, even when the backup condition as the writing condition different from the occurrence condition of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied, the backup process of storing the backup target data is executed. When a writing condition different from such a generation condition is satisfied, a writing process for writing and storing game-related information different from information regarding a plurality of electronic components in a storage area such as a log area. Can be executed. When an event corresponding to a defect in an electronic component occurs, backup data including game-related information is stored, so it is possible to easily specify the relationship between the progress of a game or performance and the defect in the electronic component. It is possible to easily grasp the situation of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

When the data to be backed up is the production control error data, the backup condition is not limited to the case where the error occurs only, and the backup condition including the time when the error is recovered may be set. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S9075, by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or by determining various detection results, When an error related to the included electronic component occurs, control for notifying the error is performed. In this case, in the production control backup process, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is satisfied, and production control error data is created. After that, when no error is detected in the electronic component that is the target of the error notification, it is determined that the error has been recovered. Even at the time of error recovery by such determination, it is possible to determine that the backup condition is satisfied in the production control backup process and create the production control error recovery data. The production control error recovery data thus created is included in the backup command for production control backup and is transmitted to the backup memory substrate 9014, similarly to the production control error data. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory substrate 9014 receives the backup command for production control backup, it may execute the writing process of the log information including the backup target data using the date and time information acquired from the RTC 90201. In addition to production control error data, production control error recovery data can also be stored as backup data, so that a history of error occurrence and recovery relating to production control can be stored for subsequent ex-post verification, and pachinko gaming machine 901 The situation of can be grasped easily.

In the power-on information processing in step S9023 of the effect control main processing, a backup restoration processing for restoring the setting and control based on the log information stored in the log area may be executed. In the backup restoration processing, verification may be performed by a verification method according to the backup target data, and it may be determined whether or not the stored data is normal. For example, when the verification method is a majority decision with error detection, if the execution result of the error detection process is normal in a predetermined number of log areas among a plurality of log areas in which backup target data indicating the same log information is stored, It is determined that the stored data is normal. In this way, if the stored data is normal, a data recovery process using the stored data in the log area is performed. On the other hand, when the stored data is not normal, the initial value setting using the initial data different from the stored data in the log area is performed. The initial data may be, for example, data stored in one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132 and used when the initialization process is executed in step S9021 of the game control main process. As a result, even if the backup target data cannot be stored correctly, it is possible to set the initial value using the initial data according to the recovery from the power failure. Instead of the initial data, special data corresponding to the case where the stored data is not normal may be used. Unlike the initial data, the special data may be data that is suitable for restoring settings and controls. Depending on the backup target data determined that the stored data is not normal, whether to use the initial data or the special data may be different. For example, if the backup target data is system data, if it is determined that the stored data is not normal, data recovery using special data is performed. On the other hand, if the backup target data is the effect output amount data, when it is determined that the stored data is not normal, data restoration using the initial data is performed. Whether to use the initial data or the special data is set in advance based on the update frequency of the backup target data, the update data amount, the importance of the data, the target component, the target control, a combination of some or all of these, and the like. It only has to be decided. The backup restoration process may be executable when a preset data restoration condition is satisfied in the production control backup process. The data recovery condition may be satisfied, for example, when a power failure recovery designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received.

In the production control backup process, it may be determined whether or not the backup memory substrate 9014 is connected to the production control substrate 9012. In this case, the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 may be determined. Depending on the determination result of the connection state, whether or not to execute the storage process may be different, or the storage process with different contents may be executed. For example, when the backup memory board 9014 is not connected to the effect control board 9012, the storage process of storing and storing the log information in the log area is not executed. In this way, a limit may be set as a limit that storage processing is not executed in a range where a preset limit condition that the backup memory substrate 9014 is not connected to the effect control substrate 9012 is satisfied. On the other hand, it is sufficient that the storage process can be executed in a range in which the backup memory substrate 9014 is connected to the effect control substrate 9012 and the restriction condition is not satisfied. As storage processing of different contents, when the backup memory board 9014 is not connected to the effect control board 9012, a storage area for storing and storing backup data indicating various log information using a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122 as a log area. Processing may be performed. In this case, the data capacity to be stored as backup target data may be reduced as compared with the case where the backup memory board 9014 is connected to the effect control board 9012. For example, the production control error data and the received command data become backup target data, and when the backup condition is satisfied, the storage process of storing the log information is executed, while the system data and the player history data are not the backup target data. Alternatively, the storage process for storing the log information may not be executed even if the backup condition is satisfied. In this way, in the range where the preset memory board 9014 is not connected to the effect control board 9012 and the preset restriction condition is satisfied, a limit is set as a limit to reduce the data capacity stored by the storage processing. May be. On the other hand, in a range in which the backup memory board 9014 is connected to the effect control board 9012 and the restriction condition is not satisfied, the data capacity to be stored by the storage processing is not reduced and the backup corresponding to all the backup conditions is performed. The target data may be stored and stored. The processing is not limited to the storage processing, and for any processing or control in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a limit may be set as a limit that a specific processing or control is not executed within a range where a preset restriction condition is satisfied. Alternatively, a limit may be set as a limit that the processing amount and the control amount are reduced as compared with the range in which the limiting condition is not satisfied.

22 and 23 show a specific example of displaying the maintenance history screen. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the setting confirmation processing is executed in step S905 of the game control main processing, and when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the main board 9011 is set to the effect control board 9012. A confirmation start command is transmitted. Upon receiving this setting confirmation start command, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120, as shown in FIG. 22(A), for example, when the maintenance mode process is executed in step S9078 of the effect control timer interrupt process. Displays the setting confirmation. In the setting confirmation display, a character display such as "setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 905. The setting confirmation display includes a character display such as "Press the push button to switch to the maintenance mode" on the image display device 905. Thus, in the setting confirmation display, a display prompting an operation for shifting to the maintenance mode is performed. At this time, when it is detected that an attendant of the game arcade or a person in charge of the manufacturer presses the push button 9031B, the image display device 905 displays a maintenance mode menu screen as shown in FIG. Enter maintenance mode. On the maintenance mode menu screen, choices of "maintenance history", "setting change/confirmation history", and "current time setting" are displayed, and the current time is also displayed.

When the “Maintenance history” option 012IW106 is selected on the maintenance mode menu screen, the image display device 905 switches to the maintenance history screen display as shown in FIG. On the maintenance history screen, the date and time and the log contents are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order so as to be ranked higher. As an example, a VDP error indicating that an abnormal internal state has occurred in the VDP 90140, an illegal prize winning error indicating that an illegal prize is detected at a winning hole such as a first special winning opening or a second special winning opening, a count switch Each log information of a switch abnormality error indicating that an abnormality of various switches such as 9023 is detected, a prize ball abnormality error indicating that a prize ball abnormality is detected, a magnet error indicating that an abnormal magnetism is detected, and a probability change failure not established. The log information indicating that is detected is displayed. When the maintenance history screen has a plurality of pages, when the next page is selected, the screen shifts to the second page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. In this case, the log information of the start of setting change and the end of setting change, the log information of the power cut date and the power-on date and time, and the log information of the left-handed notification and the full tank notification are displayed. If there is a next page, the next page selection operation causes the screen to shift to the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. At this time, the log information indicating the start of setting confirmation and the end of setting confirmation, the log information indicating that the current time is set during the maintenance mode during the setting confirmation, and the log indicating that the RAM clearing by the initialization process has been executed. Information is displayed. When the operation of selecting the next page is further performed, the screen shifts to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. Here, the log information of the RWM abnormality error indicating that some kind of RAM abnormality has occurred when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned on, and the log information of the power-off date and time and the power-on date and time corresponding to the date and time after that are displayed. .. According to these log information, since the RWM abnormal error has occurred, the clerk at the game arcade once turns off the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 and then turns on the clear switch to turn on the power again and execute the initialization process. It can be confirmed afterwards that the RAM has been cleared. Further, CPU exception event log information indicating that an exception event has occurred in the CPU 90131, and log information of power cutoff date and power-on date and time corresponding to a later date and time are displayed. Due to the CPU exception event generated by these log information, the staff at the game arcade stopped the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901, but when the power was turned on the next day, the CPU exception event no longer occurred. You can confirm that afterwards.

Note that, on the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 23(E), the log information indicating that the current time has been set indicates a time earlier than the log information indicating that the setting confirmation has started. Log information is displayed. For example, the setting confirmation is started at 09:36:28 on 2018/03/21 (Wednesday), whereas the setting of the current time is 09:36: on 2018/03/21 (Wednesday). It is supposed to be 16. As described above, the inconsistency of the date and time before and after the setting of the current time occurs because the date and time information after the setting is read and the log information is recorded when the current time is set. In this example, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information is generated, and the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information is generated even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting.

In addition to displaying the maintenance history screen, or instead of displaying the maintenance history screen, a two-dimensional bar code may be displayed on the image display device 905 so that log information can be acquired. For example, a two-dimensional barcode displayed on the image display device 905 is photographed using a photographing device connected to the inspection device. Log information can be provided to the inspection apparatus by capturing such a two-dimensional barcode. In addition, the log information may be output using any output method such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of some or all of these. The information output is not limited to log information, and any information output can be performed using any output method such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of some or all of these. I wish I had it.

The log information that can be displayed on the maintenance history screen may be all of the log information shown in the backup data or a part of the log information shown in the backup data. For example, on the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of an event that can be established according to the internal state of the control device, such as an exceptional event of the CPU 90131, can be displayed. Further, on the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of an event that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the processing device, such as an error interrupt request of the VDP 90140, can be displayed. On the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of a specific event that can be established according to the processing result by the CPU 90131, such as when an error occurs in the backup process during production control, when the time is changed, and when the power is turned on again, can be displayed. Is. On the other hand, on the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions of events other than specific events such as data update of player history data in backup control during production control, determination of power saving setting, name setting do not do. As described above, the log information stored as backup data may include log information that is not displayed on the maintenance history screen. Alternatively, log information that is not displayed on the normal maintenance history screen but can be displayed on the special maintenance history screen may be provided. The special maintenance screen may be displayed according to an arbitrary detection result such as a detection result of a predetermined operation on the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B. In this case, the operation procedure for the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B is not notified to the staff at the game arcade and may be recognized by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The present invention is not limited to the detection result, and any special maintenance history screen can be displayed according to arbitrary control or processing. In this way, a limit may be set as a limit that the log is not displayed on the maintenance history screen in the range of the specific type of log information among the plurality of types of log information. The log information other than the specific type may be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Alternatively, within a range of a specific type of log information among a plurality of types of log information, a limit may be set as a limit that it can be displayed only on a special maintenance history screen and is not displayed on a normal maintenance history screen.

FIG. 24 shows a specific example in which a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode. In response to the detection of the operation of pressing the push button 9031B by the staff of the game arcade or the person in charge of the manufacturer when the setting confirmation display as shown in FIG. 24(A) is displayed, FIG. The maintenance mode menu screen as shown in is displayed. Then, the option 012IW107 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and operated. In this case, the image display device 905 switches to the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen as shown in FIG. On the setting change/confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether the setting is changed or confirmed, and the changed setting value or the confirmed setting value are displayed in association with each other so that the latest log information is at the top. They are displayed in order. If the “current time setting” option is selected and operated while the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed, the image display device 905 switches to displaying the current time setting screen. On the current time setting screen, year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second items are selected by tilting left and right of the stick controller 9031A, and numbers for each item are selected by tilting operation of the stick controller 9031A before and after. To be done. After the current time setting screen is displayed, when the staff member of the game arcade or the person in charge of the manufacturer presses the push button 9031B, the current date and time is set to the currently displayed date and time.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 41AK)
FIG. 25 shows an example of executing a backup process for the characteristic part 41AK. In this case, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the program read from one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132, so that the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 and the occurrence event information creation processing units 41AKM21 to 41AKM23. It has a function. In addition, a writing flag 41AKF1 and a backup data buffer 41AKB1 are provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133. The backup data buffer 41AKB1 includes a plurality of buffer areas including buffer areas 41AKB11 to 41AKB13. Backup data memories 90210A to 90210C of the backup memory substrate 9014 are provided with backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The backup storage unit 41AKA1 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13 as log areas. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23 as log areas. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33 as log areas.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM21 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 41AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exceptional backup process in step S9042 of the CPU exceptional event occurrence process, and is data indicating log information including exceptional event information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM22 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process at the time of error interrupt in step S9052 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM23 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the production control error determination 41AKC3. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the effect control backup processing in step S9079 of the effect control timer interrupt processing, and is data indicating log information including effect control error data. If The backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing units 41AKM21 to 41AKM23 is temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 in the order of creation. For example, the backup data created first is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB11, the backup data created next is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB12, and the backup data created subsequently is written in the buffer area 41AKB13. Stored.

When there is backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1, the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 reads and acquires the backup data. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this execution example, the same backup data is distributed and stored overlappingly in the three backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3 in correspondence with the multiplicity of "3". For example, the backup data read from the buffer area 41AKB11 of the backup data buffer 41AKB1 and acquired is the backup storage area 41AKA11 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA21 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA31 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. It is stored by copying and writing. At the start of writing backup data to the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3, the writing flag 41AKF1 is set to the ON state. At the end of the writing of the backup data, the writing flag 41AKF1 is cleared and turned off. When the writing flag 41AKF1 is off, the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 permits writing of new backup data, and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1. On the other hand, when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, the writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 is not read.

For example, when the backup data read from the buffer area 41AKB11 of the backup data buffer 41AKB1 and acquired is written to the log area and the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB12. Can be read. The backup data read and acquired at this time is copied and written in the backup storage area 41AKA12 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area AKA22 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA32 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. Remembered. When the writing in the log area is completed in this way and the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB13 can be read. In this case, the backup data read and acquired should be copied and written in the backup storage area 41AKA13 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA23 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA33 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. Remembered in.

The backup storage unit 41AKA1 is provided as one continuous storage area by, for example, assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 is provided as one continuous storage area, for example, by assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 is provided as one continuous storage area, for example, by assigning consecutive addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33. When the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, writing of new backup data is prohibited. As a result, if the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components and the backup data writing process corresponding to one of the conditions is being executed, , The backup data write process corresponding to the other condition is not executed.

For example, if the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied and the backup data writing process corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is being executed, the writing flag 41AKF1 must be ON. Accordingly, the backup data write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is not executed. Alternatively, if the conditions for the occurrence of the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied and the backup data write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is being executed, the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned on. In response to this, the write processing of the backup data corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is not executed. Which writing process is executed first may be determined according to the backup data creation order. When the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and the effect control error judgment 41AKC3 are satisfied, or when the effect control error judgment 41AKC3 and the CPU internal error 41AKC1 are satisfied, the writing process is similarly executed. You can control it. As described above, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the range in which the backup data write process corresponding to one condition is being executed is the limit that the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition is not executed. As a limit is set. As long as the backup data write process corresponding to one condition is not being executed, the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition can be executed.

The order of creating the backup data may be determined according to the processing priority of the effect control microcomputer 90120. For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied, the priority of the CPU exception event occurrence processing is higher than the priority of the VDP error interrupt processing, and therefore the occurrence event information creation processing unit. The backup data created by the 41AKM 21 may be executed before the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 41AKM22. When the occurrence conditions of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and the effect control error determination 41AKC3 are satisfied, the priority of the VDP error interrupt process is higher than the priority of the effect control timer interrupt process, so that the event information is created. The creation of backup data by the processing unit 41AKM22 may be executed before the creation of backup data by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM23.

The condition for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device such as an exceptional event of the CPU 90131. The generation condition of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the processing device such as the error interrupt request of the VDP 90140. The occurrence condition of the production control error determination 41AKC3 can be established according to a processing result by the CPU 90131, such as a determination when an error occurs in the production control backup process. Therefore, when the conditions for the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the condition for the production control error determination 41AKC3. become.

For example, when the occurrence conditions of the CPU internal error 41AKC1 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order of the backup data creation. When the occurrence conditions of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order of the backup data creation. When the occurrence conditions of the production control error determination 41AKC3 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which the occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order of the backup data creation. In these cases, the writing is prohibited when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON, so that if the writing process corresponding to the previous generation condition is being executed, the writing corresponding to the next generation condition is performed. Do not execute embedded processing. As described above, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied multiple times among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components, the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, a limit is set as a limit that the writing process corresponding to the next generation condition is not executed. As long as the writing process corresponding to the previous generation condition is not being executed, the writing process corresponding to the next generation condition may be executed.

When a plurality of generating conditions are satisfied, whether or not any one of the writing processes is executed may be determined according to the order in which the generating conditions are satisfied. For example, when another generating condition is satisfied during execution of the writing process corresponding to the generating condition that is satisfied first, the writing process corresponding to the generating condition that is satisfied later may not be executed. Alternatively, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the processing priority when a plurality of generating conditions are satisfied. For example, when the occurrence conditions of the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied at the same time, the processing priority of the CPU exception event occurrence processing is higher than the processing priority of the VDP error interrupt processing. The write process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 may not be executed. In addition, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the overwrite process according to the process priority may be executed. For example, when the occurrence conditions of the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied at the same time, the processing priority of the CPU exception event occurrence processing is higher than the processing priority of the VDP error interrupt processing. The writing process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed as an overwriting process for overwriting the stored data by the writing process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2.

When a plurality of backup conditions are satisfied as a plurality of occurrence conditions, the creation order of backup data and whether or not to execute a writing process may be determined according to the content of the backup target data. For example, if the backup condition at the time of an error that the backup target data is the production control error data and the backup condition at the time of receiving the command that the backup target data is the received command data are satisfied at the same time, the backup condition at the time of the error occurrence It is also possible to execute the writing process corresponding to (1) and the writing process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of receiving the command later. Alternatively, the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the error occurs may be executed, and the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the command is received may not be executed. In this case, the information regarding the defect of the electronic component including the rendering device is preferentially stored, so that the possibility of appropriately dealing with the defect of the electronic component is increased. Alternatively, the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the command is received may be executed first, and the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the error occurs may be executed later. Further, the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the command is received may be executed, and the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the error occurs may not be executed. In this case, since the information regarding the reception status of the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 is preferentially stored, the possibility of being able to appropriately deal with the problem of the control regarding the game is increased.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 42AK)
FIG. 26 shows an example of executing a backup process for the characteristic part 42AK. In this case, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the program read from one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132, so that the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 and the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 to 42AKM21 to It has the function of 42AKM23. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210C of the backup memory substrate 9014 are provided with the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13, the backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23, and the backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33. The backup storage unit 42AKA11 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA12 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA13 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA21 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA21 to 42AKA213 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA22 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA23 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA31 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA31 to 42AKA313 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA32 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA33 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333 as log areas.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 42AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exceptional backup process in step S9042 of the CPU exceptional event occurrence process, and is data indicating log information including exceptional event information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM22 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process at the time of error interrupt in step S9052 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM23 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the production control error determination 42AKC3. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the effect control backup processing in step S9079 of the effect control timer interrupt processing, and is data indicating log information including effect control error data. If The backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing units 42AKM21 to 42AKM23 can be stored in parallel in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3.

The memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory writing processing unit 42AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory writing processing unit 42AKM13 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM23. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3.

Also in this execution example, the multiplicity corresponds to "3". The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 is redundantly distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM22 is redundantly distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23. The same backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKA23 is stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33 in a distributed manner while overlapping. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 42AKA111 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA121 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA131 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. , Is stored by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 42AKA112 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA122 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA132 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. It is stored by copying and writing. The backup data further acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 includes the backup storage area 42AKA113 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA123 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, the backup storage area 42AKA133 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13, and the like. It is stored by copying and writing.

In the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13 and the backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23, for example, different addresses are assigned between the backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113 and the backup storage areas 42AKA21 to 42AKA213, and the backup storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123 and the backup storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA131 to 42AKA133 and the backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233 to provide different storage areas. In the backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23 and the backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33, for example, different addresses are assigned between the backup storage areas 42AKA21 to 42AKA213 and the backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313, and the backup storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223 are backed up. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA231 to 42AKA233 and the backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333 to provide different storage areas. In the backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33 and the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13, for example, different addresses are allocated between the backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313 and the backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113, and the backup storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323 and the backup storage areas 42AKA11 to 42AKA13. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA331 to 42AKA333 and the backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133 to provide different storage areas. Note that different storage areas may be provided by using physically different storage devices. The memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can execute backup data write processing in parallel with each other. As a result, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components are satisfied, while the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is being executed, the other condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute backup data write processing corresponding to the conditions.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are satisfied, the memory write processing unit 42AKM11 is executing the backup data write processing corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC1 even while the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 is executing. Can execute the write processing of the backup data corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. When the conditions for occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 and the effect control error determination 42AKC3 are satisfied, the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 executes the memory write process even while the backup data write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 is being executed. The part 42AKM13 can execute the writing process of the backup data corresponding to the error determination during production control 42AKC3. When the conditions for producing the error determination during production control 42AKC3 and the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied, the memory writing processing unit 42AKM13 performs the memory writing process even while the backup data writing process corresponding to the during production control error determination 42AKC3 is being executed. The unit 42AKM11 can execute the writing process of the backup data corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC. In this way, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition can be executed even within the range where the backup data write process corresponding to the one condition is being executed. I wish I could. As long as the backup data write process corresponding to one condition is not being executed, it is naturally enough that the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition can be executed.

The condition for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 can be established according to the internal state of the control device such as an exceptional event of the CPU 90131. The generation condition of the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the processing device, such as the error interrupt request of the VDP 90140. The generation condition of the production control error determination 42AKC3 can be established according to a processing result by the CPU 90131, such as a determination when an error occurs in the production control backup process. Therefore, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the case where the condition for the production control error determination 42AKC3 is satisfied. May become. For example, when the backup data is created, the creation order is determined according to the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 90120, so that the backup data write processing by the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 is also created in the creation order. It may be executed with the following priority.

FIG. 27 shows an example of execution of the backup processing relating to the characteristic part 42AK, which is different from the case of FIG. In this execution example, when the occurrence conditions of the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which the occurrence conditions are met, and the write processing can be executed in the backup data creation order. .. In this case, a writing flag 42AKF1 and a backup data buffer 42AKB1 are provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133. The backup data buffer 42AKB1 includes a plurality of buffer areas including buffer areas 42AKB11 to 42AKB13. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data in the order in which the CPU internal error 42AKC1 occurs. For example, when the occurrence conditions of the CPU internal errors X1 to Xn corresponding to n times are satisfied as the CPU internal errors 42AKC1 of a plurality of times, the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 causes the backup data Y1 corresponding to the occurrence conditions of each time. ~Yn are created and temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. For example, the backup data created first is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB11, the backup data created next is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB12, and the backup data created subsequently is written in the buffer area 42AKB13. Stored. When there is backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1, the memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 reads and acquires this. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13. At the start of writing backup data to the log area, the writing flag 42AKF1 is set to the ON state. At the end of the writing of the backup data, the writing flag 42AKF1 is cleared and turned off. When the writing flag 42AKF1 is off, the memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 permits writing of new backup data, and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. On the other hand, when the writing flag 42AKF1 is ON, writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1 is not read.

Even if the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 occurrence conditions are met multiple times, the backup data may be created in the order in which those occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process may be executed in the backup data creation order. Even when the occurrence conditions of the production control error determination 42AKC3 are satisfied multiple times, the backup data may be created in the order in which the occurrence conditions are satisfied, and the writing process may be executed in the order of the backup data creation. .. In these cases, the writing is prohibited when the writing flag provided corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 or the effect control error determination 42AKC3 is ON, so that the previous occurrence condition is met. If the writing process is being executed, the writing process corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. As described above, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied multiple times among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components, the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, a limit is set as a limit that the writing process corresponding to the next generation condition is not executed. As long as the writing process corresponding to the previous generation condition is not being executed, the writing process corresponding to the next generation condition may be executed.

When a plurality of generating conditions are satisfied, whether or not any one of the writing processes is executed may be determined according to the order in which the generating conditions are satisfied. For example, when another generating condition is satisfied during execution of the writing process corresponding to the generating condition that is satisfied first, the writing process corresponding to the generating condition that is satisfied later may not be executed. Alternatively, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the processing priority when a plurality of generating conditions are satisfied. For example, among the exceptional events of the CPU 90131, the exceptional event with the high processing priority and the exceptional event with the low processing priority may be set in advance. If the conditions for the occurrence of the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied a plurality of times at the same time, the writing process corresponding to the exceptional event having the high processing priority is executed, and the writing process corresponding to the exceptional event having the low processing priority is performed. It may not be executed. In addition, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the overwrite process according to the process priority may be executed. For example, when the conditions for occurrence of the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied at the same time a plurality of times, the writing process corresponding to the exceptional event having the high processing priority stores the stored data by the writing process corresponding to the exceptional event having the low processing priority. It may be executed as an overwriting process for overwriting.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 43AK)
FIG. 28 shows an example of execution of backup processing relating to the characteristic part 43AK. In this case, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the program read from one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132, so that the functions of the memory writing processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 and the occurrence event information creation processing are performed. Functions of the units 43AKM21 and 43AKM22 are provided. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210C of the backup memory substrate 9014 are provided with the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 as well as the backup storage unit 43AKA21. The backup storage unit 43AKA11 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA11 to 43AKA113 as log areas. The backup storage unit 43AKA12 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA121 to 43AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 43AKA13 is an 8-bit storage area and includes backup storage areas 43AKA131 to 43AKA133 as log areas. On the other hand, the backup storage unit 43AKA21 is a 3-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA21 to 43AKA213 as log areas. The 8-bit storage area is a storage area in which writing processing and reading processing of storage data can be executed in 8-bit units. The 3-bit storage area is a storage area in which a writing process and a reading process of stored data can be executed in units of 3 bits.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition of the storage area bit number "8" and the multiplicity "3" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is redundantly distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, which are 8-bit storage areas. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA111 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA121 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA131 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. , Is stored by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA112 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA122 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA132 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is stored by copying and writing. The backup data further acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is the backup storage area 43AKA113 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA123 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA133 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is stored by copying and writing.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition of the storage area bit number being "3" and the multiplicity being "1" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log area of the backup storage unit 43AKA21. For the backup storage unit 43AKA21, which is a 3-bit storage area, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is less than the storage area of the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. It is stored in the area. Specifically, a 3-bit storage area that corresponds to a storage area bit number of “3” and becomes storage data in 3-bit units smaller than the 8-bit storage area of the 8-bit storage area is used. Further, when the multiplicity corresponds to "1", a single backup data is stored without being distributed without mirroring. For example, the backup data initially acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by being written in the backup storage area 43AKA211 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by being written in the backup storage area 43AKA212 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the incident event information creation processing unit 22 is stored by being written in the backup storage area 43AKA213 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying.

In the backup control table 120T, when the backup target data is any one of the system data, the production control error data, the player history data, the received command data, and the set value change time data, the storage area bit number is “8” and is large. Severity is designated as "3". On the other hand, when the data is any one of the power saving setting data, the current time change data, the power off time data, the store name setting data, and the effect output amount data, the storage area bit number is “3” and the multiplicity is “1”. Is set to. For example, when the backup target data satisfies the backup condition corresponding to the system data, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM11. It is written and stored in the log area. On the other hand, when the backup target data satisfies the backup condition corresponding to the power saving setting data, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is small in the backup storage unit 43AKA21 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM12. It is written and stored in the log area. In this way, when writing the first information corresponding to the first generation condition, the same backup data is stored in the plurality of log areas in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. On the other hand, when writing the second information corresponding to the second generation condition, the backup data is stored in a small log area in the backup storage unit 43AKA21.

For example, the occurrence condition at the time of power saving change, which is the backup condition for the backup target data corresponding to the power saving setting data, is less frequently satisfied than the occurrence condition at the time of data update, which is the backup condition for the backup target data corresponding to the system data. As described above, the second occurrence condition may be one that is less frequently satisfied than the first occurrence condition. The event corresponding to the occurrence condition that is frequently satisfied affects the storage of the log information regarding other events when the log information cannot be properly stored, for example, when noise occurs during the writing process. Is likely to give. An event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is rarely satisfied is less likely to affect the storage of log information regarding another event, as compared with an event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is frequently satisfied. Therefore, when the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition that is frequently satisfied is written, by storing the same backup data in a plurality of log areas, it is possible to prevent the trouble caused by the abnormality of the stored data from spreading. On the other hand, when the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition that is rarely satisfied is written, the backup data is stored in the small log area, so that the storage data capacity can be prevented from increasing.

The power saving setting data can be set by an administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901, such as an attendant of a game hall. As described above, the second information corresponding to the second generation condition may be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The data that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be reset by the administrator even if a problem occurs in the setting contents, and there is a possibility that the player of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be disadvantaged. Low. On the other hand, for example, data corresponding to the occurrence condition of an event that occurs according to the progress of a game or production is impossible or difficult to reset, and there is a high possibility that the player will be disadvantaged or distrusted. Shows information about. Therefore, when the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition that cannot be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is written, the same backup data is stored in a plurality of log areas, so that verification can be accurately performed when an abnormality occurs. The nature is enhanced. On the other hand, when the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is written, the backup data is stored in a small log area, so that the storage data capacity can be prevented from increasing. The information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to the information shown in the power saving setting data, but the RTC information shown in the current time change data, the store name information shown in the store name setting data, It may be information of volume and light amount shown in the effect output amount data, or a combination of some or all of these. In addition, when a projector is used as the rendering device, information about display settings by the projector may be included in the information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Note that the display setting information by the projector can be set by a person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901, unlike the staff at the game arcade. As described above, the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may include a staff member of the gaming hall, or may include a person in charge of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The information that is not limited to the projector and may be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may include information on the setting regarding the effect frequency using a specific effect device.

In the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 that are 8-bit storage areas, different backup storage areas may be provided according to the type of log information indicated in the backup data. For example, the backup storage area when the backup target data is the received command data may be provided as a storage area different from the backup storage area when the backup target data is the effect control error data. A backup storage area corresponding to an exceptional event of the CPU 90131 or an error interrupt request of the VDP 90140 may be provided inside or outside the backup storage area corresponding to the effect control error data. In this way, when the backup storage area according to the type of log information is provided in the 8-bit storage area, the memory write processing unit 43AKM11 determines that the backup storage area is determined according to the established backup condition. Then, the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 may be written and stored.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 44AK)
FIG. 29 shows a configuration example regarding the characteristic unit 44AK. In this configuration example, a first effect control board 44AK12A and a second effect control board 44AK12B are provided. The first effect control board 44AK12A and the second effect control board 44AK12B may have the configurations and functions of the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 in the above-described embodiment. A first control unit 44AK10A, a first backup storage unit 44AK11A, and a connector 44AK13A are mounted on the first effect control board 44AK12A. A second control unit 44AK10B, a second backup storage unit 44AK11B, and a connector 44AK13B are mounted on the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13A of the first effect control board 44AK12A is connected to the connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B is connected to the connector 44AK11B of the first effect control board 44AK12A. The first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B may each have a part or all of the configuration and function of the effect control microcomputer 90120 in the above-described embodiment. For example, the first control unit 44AK10A has a configuration and functions related to the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120, and the second control unit 44AK10B has a configuration and functions related to the VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may each have a part or all of the configuration and function of the backup memory board 9014 in the above-described embodiment. For example, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A has a configuration and functions relating to the backup data memories 210A and 210B of the backup memory substrate 9014, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B has a configuration relating to the backup data memories 210C and 210D of the backup memory substrate 9014. It has a function.

In the first effect control board 44AK12A, when the first control unit 44AK10A has the configuration and functions related to the CPU 90131 in the above-described embodiment, for example, the effect of the serial communication circuit 90137 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the effect data memory board 9016. A process for controlling the first electronic component such as a data memory is executed. In this case, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A stores backup data indicating log information regarding the first control unit 44AK10A. In the second effect control board 44AK12B, the second control unit 44AK10B has, for example, a voice processing circuit 90141, a lamp control circuit 90142, a motor control circuit of the effect control microcomputer 90120 when it has the configuration and functions related to the VDP 90140 in the above embodiment. A process for controlling the second electronic component such as 90143 and the image display device 905 is executed. In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B stores backup data indicating log information regarding the second control unit 44AK10B. In this way, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can store information about the first control unit 44AK10A, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can store information about the second control unit 44AK10B.

When the first control unit 44AK10A has the configuration and functions related to the CPU 90131, the log information including the exceptional event information of the CPU 90131 is obtained by executing the exceptional time backup process of step S9042 in the CPU exceptional event occurrence process. It is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When the second control unit 44AK10B has a configuration and functions related to the VDP 90140, the log information including the VDP error information of the VDP 90140 is executed by executing the error interrupt backup process of step S9052 in the VDP error interrupt process. Is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. In this way, when the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, the exceptional backup processing in the CPU exceptional event occurrence processing is executed. On the other hand, when the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, VDP error allocation is performed as a process different from the case where the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. Backup processing at the time of error interruption in the interruption processing may be executed. In addition, arbitrary storage processing different from each other is performed when the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and when the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. May be.

In the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, log information including exceptional event information of the CPU 90131 is stored. On the other hand, in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information including the VDP error information of the VDP 90140 is stored as information different from the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. Alternatively, the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A stores, for example, log information regarding an error that has occurred in the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B. On the other hand, in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, for example, log information regarding an error that has occurred in the image display device 905 is stored. In addition, in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information regarding arbitrary different electronic components may be stored.

It should be noted that the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event relating to the first control unit 44AK10A may be stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, or in addition to or instead of this, log information may be stored. The log information corresponding to the event occurrence condition relating to the 2 control unit 44AK10B may be stored. In the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event relating to the second control unit 44AK10B may be stored. In addition to or instead of this, the first control Log information corresponding to the event occurrence condition relating to the unit 44AK10A may be stored. When both log information are stored in both log areas, even if a storage error occurs in one log area, an inspection such as analysis can be performed using the log information stored in the other log area. It becomes possible and reliability of the stored data is improved. The configuration and function of the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the configuration and function of the effect control microcomputer 90120 related to the VDP 90140 are not limited to being divided into the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B. For example, the configuration and function relating to the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 may be divided into the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B. Alternatively, the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B may be provided corresponding to a plurality of CPUs. The first control unit 44AK10A may have a configuration and a function related to the CPU, and the second control unit 44AK10B may have a configuration and a function related to the light emission control.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B are different from the first effect control board 44AK12A having the first control unit 44AK10A and the second effect control board 44AK12B having the second control unit 44AK10B. For example, it may be mounted on the backup memory substrate 9014. In this case, log information about the electronic component called the first control unit 44AK10A mounted on the first effect control board 44AK12A and log information about the electronic component called the second control unit 44AK10B installed on the second effect control board 44AK12B. Can be stored in the log areas of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B mounted on the common backup memory substrate 9014. As described above, the backup data indicating the log information regarding the plurality of electronic components provided on the plurality of control boards may be stored in the log area of the storage device provided on the common backup memory board. Alternatively, the first backup memory board on which the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is mounted and the second backup memory board on which the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is mounted are the first effect control board 44AK12A and the second effect control board 44AK12B. It may be provided as a substrate different from.

For example, the storage data capacity of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is 1 MB (megabytes). On the other hand, the storage data capacity of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is 512 KB (kilobytes). In this way, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured as different storage devices in that the storage data capacities are different. Alternatively, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is configured by using a nonvolatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark). On the other hand, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is configured using, for example, an SRAM with a battery. When a nonvolatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) is used, the stored data can be erased by inputting a specific signal such as a clear signal. When the SRAM with battery is used, the stored data can be erased by removing the battery, for example, in addition to inputting the specific signal. Alternatively, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may have different storage data transmission methods. For example, the storage data of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is transmitted by the serial communication system, and the storage data of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is transmitted by the parallel communication system. The combination of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B and the serial communication system and the parallel communication system can be arbitrarily changed. In this case, the serial communication system may be capable of transmitting and receiving the communication data corresponding to the serial communication standard having a higher communication speed than the parallel communication system, or may be the serial communication standard having a lower communication speed than the parallel communication system. Corresponding communication data may be transmitted and received. The transmission speed of the stored data may be different depending on the configuration of the data line (whether shared or not), the hardware configuration of the communication circuit, or a combination thereof regardless of the serial communication standard. As described above, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B differ in the method of realizing the backup function, the difference in the material forming the memory cells, the method of erasing the stored data, and the storage data Both storage units may be configured as storage devices different from each other in that the transmission method or the transmission speed of the stored data is different. In addition, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured as storage devices different from each other due to arbitrary differences. In the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, the storage data capacity, the method of implementing the backup function, the material for forming the memory cells, the method of erasing the storage data, and any other device configuration or storage function Some or all of them may be configured as a common storage device. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can have any combination of configurations and functions.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A can hold the stored contents without using a backup power source, as in the case of being configured using FRAM (registered trademark), for example. In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can hold the stored contents by using a backup power source, as in the case where the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is configured by using an SRAM with a battery. In such a configuration, the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be partially or entirely stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When some log information is stored, the target log information is based on update frequency, update data amount, data importance, target parts, target control, or a combination of some or all of these. , It may be predetermined. In a storage device capable of holding stored contents by using a backup power supply, the stored data is erased when the backup power supply disappears. Therefore, the stored data of the storage device that can retain the stored content by using the backup power supply is stored in the storage device that can retain the stored content without using the backup power supply to ensure the loss of the stored data. It can be prevented.

Whether to display on the maintenance history screen according to whether the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. The settings may be different. For example, the log information stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can be displayed on the maintenance history screen, while the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is displayed on the maintenance history screen. It may be set not to be displayed. Even in this case, if the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is also stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, substantially all log information is stored. It can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, since the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is not the read target when the maintenance history screen is displayed, the log information stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. Handling is different from. Not limited to the display of the maintenance history screen, the setting of whether or not to read the log information is different between the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B when performing arbitrary output. Good. As described above, the range of the log information stored in one of the log areas of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is not a read target when performing output. May be provided. On the other hand, in the range of the log information stored in the other log area, it may be a read target when outputting.

The configuration and functions of the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 in the above-described embodiment are as follows: It is realized by a configuration divided into a second effect control board 44AK12B provided with a second backup storage unit 44AK11B. In this case, for example, separate developers share the development of the configuration and functions of the first effect control board 44AK12A and the development of the configuration and functions of the second effect control board 44AK12B, and proceed in parallel. be able to. This reduces the burden of development work and prevents an increase in manufacturing cost.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 45AK)
FIG. 30 shows a setting example of the inspection designation command relating to the characteristic part 45AK. The inspection designation command is included in a plurality of test commands received when executing backup inspection processing, for example. FIG. 30A shows a setting example 45AK01 of an inspection output command and an inspection specifying command that can specify a communication method. The inspection output unit may be any connector as long as it can select and specify the connector used as the inspection signal output unit from the connectors 90152 to 156, for example. The inspection output section may be capable of inputting/outputting the inspection signal and outputting the read signal corresponding to the backup data. The communication method may be parallel or serial, and in the case of serial, any serial communication standard such as UART, SPI, and I2C may be selected and designated. As the inspection designation command in the setting example 45AK01, a plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 are prepared in advance. The plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 may have different designation contents of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 and the communication method.

The connector 90152 is wire-connected to the effect control relay board 9017, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as the driver circuit mounted on the driver board 9019, the effect motor 9060, and the effect LED 9061. The connector 90153 is wire-connected to the lamp output board 9013 and can output a control signal to an electronic component such as a driver circuit mounted on the lamp output board 9013. The connector 90154 is wire-connected to the backup memory board 9014 and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as the RTC 90201 mounted on the backup memory board 9014, the serial communication circuit 90202, and the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D. The connector 90155 is wire-connected to the effect data memory board 9016, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as a plurality of effect data memories mounted on the effect data memory board 9016. As described above, the connectors 90152 to 90155 can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components. On the other hand, the connectors 90152 to 90155 are designated as any of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, and thus read signals of backup data indicating the log information read from the log area. It is possible to output a read signal corresponding to the stored information. Since the connector 90156 is connected to the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 901 by wiring, a control signal for the electronic component is not output. On the other hand, the connector 90156 can output a read signal according to the stored information, such as a read signal of backup data indicating the log information read from the log area. For example, the connector 90156 becomes the output terminal of the read signal according to the log information by being designated as one of the test output sections 45AKC to 45AKC4 by the test designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4.

The inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 that can be designated by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 may include a part of the connectors 90152 to 156, or may include all of the connectors 90152 to 156. The inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 may include connectors common to each other, or may include connectors different from other inspection output units. For example, the effect relay wiring connector 90152 can input and output a plurality of types of control signals and detection signals according to the specifications of various circuits mounted on the effect control relay board 9017, the audio output board 9018, and the driver board 9019. It suffices if it is configured and included in the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4. On the other hand, for example, the frame lamp wiring connector 90153 is configured to be capable of inputting and outputting a parallel signal, and is included in the inspection output unit 45AKC1 of the inspection specifying command 45AKA1 in which parallel is specified as the communication method. On the other hand, the connector 90153 is not included in the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection specification commands 45AKA2 to 45AKA4 in which any one of the serial communication standards is specified as the communication method. Further, for example, the backup wiring connector 90154 is configured to be capable of inputting and outputting a signal conforming to the SPI serial communication standard, and the inspection output unit 45AKC3 of the inspection specifying command 45AKA3 in which the SPI serial communication standard is specified as the communication method. include. On the other hand, the connector 90154 is not included in the inspection output units 45AKC1, 45AKC2, 45AKC4 of the inspection specification commands 45AKA1, 45AKA2, 45AKA4 in which parallel or UART or I2C serial signal standard is specified as the communication method. As described above, the connectors 90152 to 90155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components include the connector 90152 capable of outputting signals by a plurality of signal systems and the connectors 90153, 154 capable of outputting signals at a specific signal system. May be included. Further, the connectors 90152 to 156 that can be designated as the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 output connectors 90152 to 90155 that can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components and control signals for the electronic components. Connector 90156 which is not provided. By specifying the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection specification commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, a signal output unit corresponding to a plurality of types of received information is selected from a plurality of mutually different signal output units such as the connectors 90152 to 156. Then, the inspection information corresponding to the inspection signal, such as the read signal of the backup data, can be output.

The CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute various lottery processes related to the presence or absence of the effect and the effect mode, such as a lottery process for the notice effect. Based on the lottery result of the lottery process, control signals corresponding to various control information are output. For example, when it is determined to execute a specific notice effect as the lottery result of the notice effect, the control signal for reading the pattern data of the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the notice effect is the connector for the effect data wiring. It is output from 90155 and transmitted to the effect data memory board 9016 via the effect data wiring. In this case, according to the pattern data of the read-out notice effect control pattern, a control signal (voice signal) for controlling the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R and a control signal for controlling the drive state of the effect motor 9060. (Drive control signal) and the like are output from the connector 90152 for effect relay wiring and transmitted to the effect control relay board 9017 via the effect relay wiring. In addition, a control signal (electric decoration signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909 is output from the connector 90153 for frame lamp wiring and transmitted to the lamp output board via the frame lamp wiring. On the other hand, the connector 90154 for backup wiring can output a control signal for electronic parts such as the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D provided on the backup memory board 9014. This control signal is a result of the lottery process. It is not output based on. As described above, the connectors 90152 to 90155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components include connectors 90152, 90153, 90155 capable of outputting control signals based on the lottery result, and a connector 90154 different from these. There is.

It suffices that the connectors 90152, 90153, 90155 can output control signals based on the lottery result and can output control signals not depending on the lottery result. As an example, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received, a control signal for controlling the demonstration effect without executing the lottery process is output from the connectors 90152, 153, 155 and the like. It Of these, the connector 90152 for effect relay wiring is a control signal (voice signal) for controlling the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R and a control signal (drive control signal) for controlling the drive state of the effect motor 9060. It is possible to output control signals according to the control information of the speakers 908L and 908R as the production devices, the production motor 9060, and the production LED 9061. The frame lamp wiring connector 90153 can output a control signal according to the control information of the game effect lamp 909 as a production device, such as a control signal (electric decoration signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909. is there. On the other hand, the connector 90155 for effect data wiring can output a control signal according to control information of an electronic component different from the effect device, such as a control signal for controlling the reading process of the effect data memory. In addition, the connector 90154 for backup wiring can output a control signal according to control information of an electronic component different from the production device, such as a control signal for controlling the reading process and the writing process of the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D. Is. In this way, the connectors 90152 to 90155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components are connectors 90152 and 90153 capable of outputting control signals according to the control information of the rendering device, and control signals for electronic components other than the rendering device. And connectors 90154 and 90155 capable of outputting

FIG. 30B shows a setting example 45AK02 of the inspection designation command capable of designating the inspection output data. The output data for inspection can be designated as backup data indicating log information by selecting a part or all of the data stored in the log area of the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D provided on the backup memory board 9014. If The inspection output data is output from one of the connectors 90152 to 156 designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4. As the inspection designation command in the setting example 45AK02, a plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 are prepared in advance. The plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 have different inspection output data.

The inspection designation command 45AKB1 designates system data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB2 designates the production control error data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation 45 command AKB3 designates the player history data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB4 designates the received command data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB5 designates the setting change time data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB6 designates the power saving setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB7 designates the current time setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB8 designates the power-off time data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB9 designates the store name setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB10 designates the effect output amount data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB11 designates the effect history data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB12 designates all stored data as inspection output data.

The backup data that can be output by designating it as the inspection output data may indicate information about a plurality of electronic components or game-related information about a game. For example, when the production control error data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB2, the backup data including the production control error data can be output, and the error that occurs in the electronic component including the production device can be specified. Backup data is output.

On the other hand, when the player history data is designated as the test output data by the test designation command 45AKB3, it becomes possible to output the backup data including the player history data, and whether an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. Regardless of whether or not the data regarding the player is updated, the backup data at the time of data update is output. When the reception command data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB4, the backup data including the reception command data can be output, regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. Backup data at the time of receiving the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 is output. When the store name setting data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB9, the backup data including the store name setting data can be output, and whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. Instead, the backup data when the name of the store corresponding to the game hall is set is output. When the system data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB1, the backup data including the system data can be output. Backup data including system data is stored regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred and backup data at the time of updating data due to an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. This includes backup data when updating data. About system data By outputting the backup data at the time of updating the data, regardless of whether the event corresponding to multiple electronic components occurs or whether the event corresponding to multiple electronic components occurs The backup data at the time of updating the data are output. In this way, it is possible to output information about electronic parts, game-related information about games, or general information not related to electronic parts or games according to the specified contents of the inspection output data by the inspection specifying command. .. It should be noted that the content specified by the inspection output data by the inspection specification command is not limited to the information about the electronic component or the information about the electronic component according to an arbitrary detection result such as a detection result of a predetermined operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B. The output information may be switchable, such as game-related information about a game or general information that is not related to electronic parts or games. Not limited to the detection result, it is possible to switch output information such as information about electronic parts, game-related information about games, or general information not related to electronic parts or games according to arbitrary control or processing. I wish I had it.

(About transformation and application)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, and a part described in the above-mentioned embodiment so that at least one problem in the conventional technology can be solved. It may be provided with the structure of.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 may not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) a start winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is released from the closed state (second state) to the open state ( (1st state), when the game ball entering the inside of the variable winning device enters a specific area (V winning opening) of the plurality of areas, it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured to.

In the above-described embodiment, the “proportion” and the “probability” at which various kinds of decisions are made are, for example, 70:30 and 0% (never decided) or 100% (must be decided). It may be set so that it is not determined), and the possibility that at least one of the determination results will be 0% (never determined) or 100% (certainly determined) It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, if the proportion of any one of the plurality of decision results is higher than the proportion of the other decision results, the proportion of one decision result is It may be included that it is 100%, and that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of 1 is 100%, the ratio of other determinations is 0%. Further, when the ratio of the other determination result is 0%, if the ratio of the determination result of 1 is other than 100% and is a predetermined ratio that is not 0%, the ratio of the determination result of 1 is the other determination result. Will be higher than the ratio.

In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the process shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the sound output operation in the speaker, and various effects including the lighting effect in the game effect lamp and the effect LED. The operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, and encloses the game medium to score points based on the occurrence of a prize. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a.

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to a slot machine or the like. The slot machine is, for example, an arbitrary gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information, and imparting a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets (the number of medals or the number of credits) for one game, and at the same time, a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (design) that can be identified by each ( One game is completed by deriving and displaying the display results of, for example, a plurality of reels, etc., and a prize is awarded according to the display result (for example, cherry prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, replay prize, BB prize, RB prize, etc.). Is a gaming machine that is capable of generating. In such a slot machine, the hardware resources including the effect moving mechanism provided on the front surface side of the slot machine and the software for performing the predetermined processing cooperate with each other, so that the pachinko machine shown in the above embodiment is operated. The gaming machine 901 may be configured to have all or some of the features.

The slot machine is not limited to one in which the number of bets is set by using medals and credits as a gaming value, and is only a slot machine in which the number of bets is set by using a gaming ball as a gaming value, or only credits as a gaming value. It may be a fully creditable slot machine in which the bet amount is set using. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls. For example, when 3 is set as the number of bets, the number of bets using 15 game balls is used. Is equivalent to the one that sets. The pachinko gaming machine 901 and the slot machine are not limited to those that use only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls. For example, a plurality of types such as medals and gaming balls may be used. It may be one that can be used together with the gaming value. For example, a slot machine can set a bet number and play a game using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and when a prize is won, a plurality of medals and game balls etc. can be played. Any type of gaming value may be payable.

The programs and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in a gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 or a slot machine, by a removable recording medium. However, it may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(Explanation on Problem Solving Means and Effects of Characteristic Section 41AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of playing a game, and a control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components such as a production control microcomputer 90120 and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. Even if the storage contents can be retained and the information about a plurality of electronic components can be stored, for example, a storage unit such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D is provided. When the occurrence condition is satisfied, for example, a writing process by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 can be executed as the writing process for writing the information in the storage unit, and the storage unit includes, for example, the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13. A storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first occurrence condition is written and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second occurrence condition is written are provided as one continuous area, such as the backup storage unit 41AKA1. For example, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied, such as the write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON, while the process of writing the information corresponding to the one condition is being performed, the other Do not execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the condition. As described above, since the process of writing the information corresponding to the other one is not executed during the process of writing the information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition, the conflict of the information writing process is avoided. It This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The generation condition may be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the generation condition according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing process for writing the information about the electronic component in the storage means is executed to store the information about the electronic component including the control means. be able to. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The first occurrence condition can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, and the second occurrence condition can be established by the control means such as the effect control error determination 41AKC3. It is possible to be satisfied according to the processing result. For example, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the writing process is executed with priority over the case where the second occurrence condition is satisfied. It may be possible. In this way, when the first generation condition that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing is given priority over the case where the second generation condition that can be satisfied according to the processing result by the control means is satisfied. By executing the plug-in process, the priority of the write process is set while avoiding the conflict of the write process of the information about the electronic component. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the next condition is determined according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition, such as the writing flag 41AKF1, is being executed. The process of writing the corresponding information may be restricted. If the process of writing information is restricted according to such execution information, conflict of processes can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

In the writing process, the same information may be stored in a plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this way, if the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas, the reliability of the information can be improved. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When the write condition different from the generation condition is satisfied, the control unit writes the game-related information different from the information about the plurality of electronic components to the storage unit, for example, the backup process according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. May be feasible. As described above, if the process of writing the game-related information corresponding to the writing condition different from the generation condition becomes executable, various information can be stored and managed. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, output means capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and capable of outputting a read signal according to stored information in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, a connector 90156, which outputs control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and a first output means such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and a read signal which is different from the first output means and which corresponds to stored information in the storage means. And second output means such as. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

(Explanation on Problem Solving Means and Effects of Characteristic Section 42AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of playing a game, and a control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components such as a production control microcomputer 90120 and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. Even if the storage contents can be retained and the information about a plurality of electronic components can be stored, for example, a storage unit such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D is provided. When the generation condition is satisfied, as the writing process for writing the information in the storage unit, for example, the writing process by the memory writing processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can be executed, and the storage unit can be, for example, the backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113. A storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first occurrence condition is written, such as a backup storage unit 42AKA11 including the backup storage area 42AKA21, the backup storage area 42AKA21 including the backup storage areas 42AKA21, and the backup storage area 42AKA31 including the backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313 , The storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written is provided as a different area, and the first generation condition and the second generation condition such as the memory write processing by the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13. When is satisfied, it is possible to execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition while the process of writing the information corresponding to the one condition is being performed. As described above, since the process of writing the information corresponding to the other one can be executed while the process of writing the information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition is executed, the efficiency of the process of writing the information can be improved. .. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The generation condition may be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the generation condition according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing process for writing the information about the electronic component in the storage means is executed to store the information about the electronic component including the control means. be able to. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The first occurrence condition can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, and the second occurrence condition can be established by the control means such as the effect control error determination 41AKC3. It is possible to be satisfied according to the processing result. For example, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the writing process is executed with priority over the case where the second occurrence condition is satisfied. It may be possible. In this way, when the first generating condition that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing is given priority over when the second generating condition that can be satisfied according to the processing result by the control means is satisfied. By executing the plug-in process, the priority of the write process is set while avoiding the conflict of the write process of the information about the electronic component. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the next condition is determined according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition, such as the writing flag 41AKF1, is being executed. The process of writing the corresponding information may be restricted. If the process of writing information is restricted according to such execution information, conflict of processes can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

In the writing process, the same information may be stored in a plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this way, if the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas, the reliability of the information can be improved. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When the write condition different from the generation condition is satisfied, the control unit writes the game-related information different from the information about the plurality of electronic components to the storage unit, for example, the backup process according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. May be feasible. As described above, if the process of writing the game-related information corresponding to the writing condition different from the generation condition becomes executable, various information can be stored and managed. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, output means capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and capable of outputting a read signal according to stored information in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, a connector 90156, which outputs control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and a first output means such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and a read signal which is different from the first output means and which corresponds to stored information in the storage means. And second output means such as. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

(Explanation on Problem Solving Means and Effects of Characteristic Section 43AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of playing a game, and a control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components such as a production control microcomputer 90120 and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. Even if the storage content can be retained and information about a plurality of electronic components can be stored, for example, a storage unit such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D is provided, and the control unit, when the write condition is satisfied, As the writing process for writing the information into the storage unit, for example, the writing process by the memory writing processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 can be executed, and when writing the first information corresponding to the first occurrence condition, for example, the backup storage unit When the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas such as 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 and the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written, the information is stored in a storage area smaller than the plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage unit 43AKA21. Memorize As described above, by providing the case where the same information is stored in the plurality of storage areas and the case where the information is stored in the storage area smaller than the plurality of storage areas, various information corresponding to the information about the plurality of electronic components can be obtained. Memories are made. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When the storage information is determined to be normal in a predetermined number of storage areas among the plurality of storage areas that store the same information as the first information, restoration is performed based on the storage information, for example, restoration by power-on information processing. The process may be executable. In this way, since the restoration process is executed when the stored information is determined to be normal in the predetermined number of storage areas, the reliability of the restoration based on the stored information is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When it is determined that the stored information corresponding to the second information is abnormal, it may be possible to execute an initial process for setting the initial information, such as initial value setting by power-on information processing. In this way, the initial process of setting the initial information is executed, so that it is possible to prevent a malfunction when it is determined that there is an abnormality. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The second occurrence condition may be less frequently satisfied than the first occurrence condition, such as a backup condition when power saving is set. In this way, various memories are performed by providing the second occurrence condition that is less frequently satisfied. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The second information may be setting information that can be set by the administrator of the gaming machine, such as power saving setting data. In this way, by storing the setting information that can be set by the administrator of the gaming machine, various kinds of storage are performed. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, connection wiring connecting the control unit and the storage unit, such as wiring connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 90154 and the terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 90220, and, for example, the terminals TM01 and TM02 of the connector 90154 and the terminal TM11 of the connector 90220. , TM12 may be provided with a connection confirmation wiring capable of confirming the connection state between the control means and the storage means. As described above, the reliability of the storage is enhanced by providing the connection confirmation wiring capable of confirming the connection state. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, output means capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and capable of outputting a read signal according to stored information in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, unlike the first output means such as connectors 90152 to 90155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and the first output means such as connector 90156, it is possible to output a read signal according to the stored information of the storage means. Second output means may be provided. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

(Explanation on Problem Solving Means and Effects of Characteristic Section 44AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of playing a game, for example, a first control unit 44AK10A, a first control unit capable of controlling a first electronic component, and a second control unit 44AK10B, for example. , Second control means capable of controlling the second electronic component, and capable of retaining stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, capable of storing information regarding the first control means and the second control means, for example, A storage unit such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D is provided, and when a write condition is satisfied, a writing process for writing information to the storage unit can be executed, and the storage unit stores information related to the first control unit. First storage means capable of, for example, the first backup storage section 44AK11A, and unlike the first storage means, second storage means capable of storing information regarding the second control means, such as the second backup storage section 44AK11B. Including and In this way, unlike the first storage means capable of storing information about the first control means, the second storage means capable of storing information about the second control means is provided, so that various storages according to the control means are provided. Is done. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When writing the information regarding the first control means, it may be possible to execute, for example, the CPU exception event occurrence processing or the VDP error interrupt processing as the processing different from the case where the information regarding the second control means is written. In this way, by performing different processing, various types of storage are performed according to the control means. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The first storage means is capable of storing information relating to an occurrence event corresponding to the first electronic component, such as log information including exception event information of the CPU 90131, and the second storage means is capable of storing VDP error interrupt information of the VDP 90140, for example. It may be possible to store information regarding an occurrence event corresponding to the second electronic component, such as log information including the log information. In this way, by storing the information regarding the occurrence event according to different electronic components, various storages according to the electronic components are performed. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The first control means can be installed as a board different from the first storage means, for example, on the first effect control board 9012A, and the second control means is a board different from the second storage means, for example, the second effect. It may be installable on the control board 9012B or the like. In this way, by installing the control means and the storage means on different substrates, maintenance work becomes easy and a flexible device configuration becomes possible. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The first storage means can hold the stored contents by using a backup power supply, for example, when an SRAM with a battery is used, and the second storage means uses a backup power supply, for example, by using FRAM (registered trademark). The stored content may be retained without being used, and the second storage means may be able to store a part of the stored content in the first storage means. As described above, the certain storage content of the first storage unit is also stored in the second storage unit, so that the reliability of the storage is improved. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, connection wires connecting the first and second control means and the second control means to the storage means, such as wires connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 90154 and the terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 90220, and the terminal TM01 of the connector 90154, A connection confirmation wiring capable of confirming a connection state between the first control unit and the second control unit and the storage unit, such as a wiring connected to the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the TM02 and the connector 90220, may be provided. As described above, the reliability of the storage is enhanced by providing the connection confirmation wiring capable of confirming the connection state. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, a display unit such as the image display device 905 may be provided, and for example, when displaying a maintenance history screen, the storage information of the second storage unit may be output by the display of the display unit. In this way, the stored information is output by the display, so that the stored content can be easily confirmed. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, a first output unit capable of outputting control signals for the first electronic component and the second electronic component, such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and reading according to stored information in the storage unit, unlike the first output unit, such as connector 90156. Second output means capable of outputting a signal may be provided. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

(Explanation on Problem Solving Means and Effects of Characteristic Part 45AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of playing a game, capable of controlling electronic components, such as control means such as a production control microcomputer 90120, and a control signal outputable connector, for example, a connector. 90152 to 90155 and other output means, the output means can output a control signal according to at least a part of the control information based on the lottery result by the control means, for example, the first connector 90152, 153, 155 or the like. The output unit and the second output unit different from the first output unit include, for example, a connector 90154. As described above, since the second output means different from the first output means capable of outputting the control signal based on the lottery result is provided, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The second output means outputs the control signal through a route different from the first output means in the same substrate as the first output means, for example, when a connector 90154 different from the connectors 90152, 153, 155 is installed. It may be possible. In this way, since the control signal is output via different paths, the reliability of various signal outputs can be enhanced. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The second output means may be able to output a control signal according to the control information of the rendering device, for example, when the connector 90152 is designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4. In this way, by outputting the control signal according to the control information of the rendering device, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The second output unit may be capable of outputting a control signal of a signal system different from that of the first output unit, for example, a communication system according to the output section setting example 45AK01. In this way, by outputting control signals of different signal systems, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

A mounting member, such as a connector 90156, capable of mounting a connecting unit to which the inspection device of the gaming machine is connected may be provided, and the mounting member may be soldered when the connecting unit is not mounted. By performing such a soldering process, disconnection due to oxidation or corrosion can be prevented even when not mounted. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The control means can execute, for example, a backup inspection process as an inspection process for outputting inspection information about the electronic component based on the received information, and, for example, the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4, etc., according to a plurality of types of received information. The inspection information may be output by different output means. As described above, the inspection information is output by the output unit according to the received information, whereby the flexibility of information output is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The output means may be capable of outputting information about electronic components such as effect control error data and game-related information about games such as system data and received command data. In this way, by outputting the information about the electronic component and the game-related information about the game, various information is output. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

1 ... pachinko game machine 2 ... game board 3 ... game machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... winning ball device 6B ... variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize hole 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary pattern display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23... Count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit 901 ... Pachinko gaming machine 9011 ... Main board 9012 ... Production control board 9014 ... Backup memory board 90120 ... Production control microcomputer 90131 ... CPU
90140 ... VDP
90150-90156... Connector 90210A-90210D... Backup data memory

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games using operation members,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
A game control means capable of controlling a plurality of types of game states including an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding to the change in the game state, and provided with effect execution means capable of executing an operation promotion effect for promoting a predetermined operation,
The effect execution means can execute the operation promotion effect in a mode corresponding to a suggestion regarding the setting means,
further,
Control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components,
Even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the stored contents can be held, and a storage means capable of storing information on the plurality of electronic components is provided,
The control means is capable of executing a writing process for writing the information in the storage means when a condition for occurrence of an event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied.
The storage means is provided with a storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written, as one continuous area,
When the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition is not executed,
Amusement machine.